himMODU Rules January 2013 PDF

Indian Register of Shipping
Rules and Regulations for

the Construction and Classification of
Mobile Offshore Drilling Units
January 2013
Publications of Indian Register of Shipping
1. Register Book - 2012 - with Quarterly Supplements (Also available on CD)
2. Rule Books
2.1 Rules and Regulations for the Construction and Classification of Steel Ships,
July 2012 comprising of following six parts, which are further divided in chapters
Part 1 : Regulations
Part 2 : Inspection and Testing of Materials
Part 3 : General Hull Requirements
Part 4 : Main and Auxiliary Machinery
Part 5 : Special Ship Types
(This part is published in two Volumes I & II)
Part 6 : Fire Safety Requirements
Rules Change Notice No.1 – January, 2013
(Consolidated Rules January, 2013 available on CD)
2.2 Rules and Regulations for the Construction and Classification of Inland
Waterways Ships, January 1997, comprising of following five* parts which are
further divided in chapters.
Part 1 : Regulations
Part 2 : Inspection and Testing of Materials
(* This part is same as the Part 2 in 2.1 above)
Part 4 : Main and Auxiliary Machinery
Part 5 : Special Ship Types (To be published)
2.3 Rules and Regulations for the Construction and Classification of Mobile
Offshore Drilling Units, January 2013 (This supersedes, March 2006 edition).
2.4 Rules and Regulations for the Construction and Classification of High Speed
Crafts and Light Crafts, July 2011. (Also available on CD)
2.5 Rules and Regulations for the Construction and Classification of Naval Ships,
January 2010, comprising of following six parts, which are further divided in
chapters.
(Only available on CD)
Part 1 : General Regulations

Part 2 : Manufacture, Testing and Certification of Materials
Part 4 : General Requirements for Main and Auxiliary Machinery
Part 5 : General Requirements for Electrical Installations and
Control Engineering
Part 6 : Special Class Notations
2.6 Rules and Regulations for the Construction and Classification of Indian Coast
Guard Ships, July 2008, comprising of following six parts, which are further divided
in chapters.
(Only available on CD)
Part 1 : General Regulations

Part 2 : Manufacture, Testing and Certification of Materials
Part 4 : General Requirements for Main and Auxiliary Machinery
Part 5 : General Requirements for Electrical Installations and
Control Engineering
Part 6 : Special Class Notations
3. Classification Notes
 Marine Gears - Calculation of load capacity of involute parallel axis spur and helical
gears, January 1997.
 Cable trays/protective casing made of plastics materials, July 2003.
 Type approval of mechanical joints used in piping, January 2009.
 Type approval, installation and testing of water level detectors on bulk carriers and
single hold cargo ships other than bulk carriers, January 2013.
 Guidelines for non-destructive examination of steel castings for marine application,
January 2005.
 Guidelines for non-destructive examination of hull and machinery steel forgings,
January 2005.
 Guidelines for approval / acceptance of alternative means of access to spaces in oil
tankers, bulk carriers, ore carriers and combination carriers, August 2006.
 Approval scheme for the manufacturing process of normal and higher strength hull
structural steels, January, 2009.
 Calculation of crankshafts for internal combustion engines, January, 2012.
 Type testing procedure for crankcase explosion relief valves, February, 2008.
 Type testing procedure for crankcase oil mist detection and alarm equipment,
February, 2008.
 Type approval of electrical equipment used in control, protection, safety and internal
communication in marine environment, February, 2008.
4. Type Approval Certification Schemes
 Type Approval Certification Scheme for Machinery Manufactured by Mass Production

System, April 2000.
 Certification Scheme for Type Approval of Products, December 2012
5. Other Information - available on Request
 List of Type Approved Products

 List of Approved Works
 List of Approved Service Suppliers.
Rules and Regulations for the Construction and Classification of Mobile Offshore Drilling Units
General Information
This edition of the 'Rules and Regulations for the Construction and Classification
of Mobile Offshore Drilling Units' (January 2013) supersedes the March, 2006
edition of the Rules.
A summary of additions and amendments incorporated in this edition are

indicated in Table 1.

Rules and Regulations for the Construction and Classification of Mobile Offshore drilling units
TABLE-1 AMENDMENTS INCORPORATED IN THIS EDITION

These amendments will come into force from 1st January 2013.
Section/ Subject/amendment
Clause
Chapter 1 : General
1/1.9.1 Reference made to the recommendatory IMO MODU Code 2009 which is effective
from 01 January 2012.
Section 2 Definitions added as per MODU Code 2009
3/3.6.2 Class notations for self propelled and non-self propelled vessels are separated.
Section 4 and 5 Requirements for operating manual elaborated as per MODU Code 2009
Chapter 2 : Periodical Surveys
1/ Table 1.1.1 Periodical survey intervals of boiler surveys updated in line with main rules.
3/ 3.2.5 Requirement for examining non-metallic expansion joints in piping during docking
surveys.
Chapter 3 : Manufacture, Survey and Certification
1/1.1.4, 1.1.4 Minimization of hazardous materials and prohibition of Asbestos
Chapter 4 : Design Loads

1/1.1.3 Limiting design conditions to be indicated in the operating manual.
3/3.2.2 Effect of immersion, heeling etc to be considered for wave loads.
7/7.1 Other loadings not mentioned in the rules will be specially considered.
Chapter 5 : Stability, Watertight / Weathertight Integrity and Loadline

Section1 Intact Stability and Damage stability requirements of all types of units updated in line
with MODU Code and IACS unified requirements.
Section 2 Requirements for external and internal watertight and weathertight openings are
updated.
Section 3 Clarifications added regarding application of Loadline requirements to various types

of drilling units.
Chapter 6 : Structures
Section 2 Requirements for access to spaces, antifouling systems and protective coating
requirements for ballast spaces.
Section 5 Requirement for towing arrangements added by referring to Main Rules.

Rules and Regulations for the Construction and Classification of Mobile Offshore drilling units
Section/ Subject/amendment
Clause
Chapter 7 : Self–elevating Drilling Units
2/2.1.4, 2.2.6 Clarifications on requirements for structural strength of deck houses and legs.
Chapter 8 : Column Stabilized Drilling Units
2/2.1.1, 2.1.2 Clarifications on structural considerations for columns and clearance requirements.
Chapter 10 : Temporary Mooring Equipment and Position Keeping Systems and

Equipment
3/3.1.1 Reference to main rules for anchoring and mooring equipment
3/3.2.9 Reference to IMO Circulars on Dynamic Positioning systems
3/3.3 Details added for the requirements of windlass and anchor line controls and alarms.
Chapter 11 : Hazardous Areas
Section 1, Amendments to definition of zones and clarification on specific areas.

Section 2
3/3.2 Clarifications on ventilation requirements in hazardous areas.
Section 4 Special requirements for dangerous goods added.
Chapter 12 : Machinery
Section 1 to 8 Requirements for machinery updated in accordance with MODU Code 2009, which is
based on SOLAS requirements applicable to MODU.
Chapter 13 : Electrical Installations
Section 1 to 7 Requirements for electrical installations updated in accordance with MODU Code
2009, which is based on SOLAS requirements applicable to MODU.
Annex 1 List of IEC standards applicable to MODU is added.
Chapter 14 : Safety Features
Section 1 to 10 Requirements for fire safety updated in accordance with MODU Code 2009, which is
based on SOLAS requirements applicable to MODU.
Section 11 Requirements for general alarms and public address systems updated in accordance
with MODU Code 2009.

Contents
Rules and Regulations for the Construction and Classification of

Mobile Offshore Drilling Units
Chapter 1 General
Chapter 2 Periodical Surveys
Chapter 3 Materials
Chapter 4 Design Loads
Chapter 5 Stability, Watertight/Weathertight Integrity and

Loadline
Chapter 6 Structures
Chapter 7 Self-Elevating Drilling Units
Chapter 8 Column Stabilized Drilling Units
Chapter 9 Surface Type Drilling Units
Chapter 10 Temporary Mooring Equipment and Position

Keeping Systems and Equipment
Chapter 11 Hazardous Areas
Chapter 12 Machinery
Chapter 13 Electrical Installations
Chapter 14 Safety Features

Page 1 of 10
___________________________________________________________________________________
Contents
Chapter 1
General
Section 1 3.10 Repairs
3.11 Alterations
General Information
3.12 Date of build
1.1 Indian Register of Shipping
3.13 Appeal from Surveyors' recommendations
1.2 Fees
3.14 Certificates
1.3 Technical committee
3.15 Suspension, withdrawal and deletion of
1.4 Survey reports class
1.5 Register of drilling units 3.16 Reclassification of drilling units
1.6 Liability
Section 4
1.7 IACS QSCS audits
Classification of Drilling Units Built
1.8 Access of Surveyor to drilling units, under the Survey of Indian Register
shipyards or works of Shipping
1.9 Compliance with statutory requirements
4.1 Classification of new constructions
Section 2 4.2 Scope
Definitions 4.3 Plans and design data
4.4 Materials
Section 3
4.5 Scantlings
Classification Regulations 4.6 Operating manuals
3.1 General 4.7 Construction booklet
3.2 Application of Rules 4.8 Records
3.3 Scope of classification Section 5

3.4 Interpretations of the Rules
Classification of Drilling Units not
3.5 Character of classification Built under the Survey of Indian
Register of Shipping
3.6 Class notations - Hull
3.7 Class notations - Machinery 5.1 General procedure for classification of

drilling units not built under survey of IRS
3.8 Materials
5.2 Plans and data to be furnished as required
3.9 Request for surveys in 5.1.1

Page 2 of 10 Contents
Chapter 2
Periodical Surveys
Section 1
3.2 Parts to be examined
General Requirements 3.3 Underwater-inspection in lieu of drydocking
survey
1.1 General
1.2 Survey pre-planning and record keeping Section 4
1.3 Reactivation surveys Special Surveys - Hull

1.4 Surveys for damage 4.1 General
1.5 Alterations 4.2 Special continuous surveys
1.6 Unscheduled surveys 4.3 Special survey No.1
1.7 Provision for hull surveys 4.4 Special survey No.2 and subsequent special
surveys
1.8 Welding and replacement of materials
Section 5
Section 2
Special Surveys - Machinery
Annual Surveys
5.1 General
2.1 General
Section 6
2.2 Survey requirements - All types of drilling
units
Surveys of Screw Shafts, Tube
2.3 Survey requirements - Surface-Type units Shafts and Propellers
2.4 Survey requirements - Self-elevating units 6.1 General
2.5 Survey requirements - Column-stabilized

units Section 7
Section 3
Boiler Surveys
Docking Surveys 7.1 General
3.1 General

Page 3 of 10
___________________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 3
Materials
Section 1 Section 2
Manufacture, Survey and Materials for Construction

Certification
2.1 Hull steel grades
1.1 General
2.2 Material selection for machinery
Chapter 4
Design Loads
Section 1 Section 4
General Current Loads
4.1 Current associated with waves

1.1 General
4.2 Drag force
Section 2
Section 5
Wind Loads
Vortex Shedding
2.1 Wind velocities

5.1 Loadings due to vortex shedding
2.2 Wind pressures and forces
Section 6
Section 3
Deck Loads
Wave Loads
6.1 General
3.1 Wave criteria
3.2 Determination of wave loads Section 7

3.3 Hydrodynamic forces
Other Loadings

Chapter 5
Stability, Watertight/Weathertight Integrity and Loadline
Section 1
2.2 Boundary penetrations
Stability 2.3 Closures
1.1 General Section 3

1.2 Intact stability criteria
Load Line
1.3 Damage stability
3.1 General
1.4 Extent of damage
3.2 Self elevating and surface type drilling units
Section 2
3.3 Column stabilized units
Watertight/Weathertight Integrity
2.1 Watertight boundaries

Chapter 6
Structures
Section 1 Section 3
General Structural Analysis
1.1 Materials 3.1 General
1.2 General requirements for scantlings 3.2 Allowable stresses
Section 2 3.3 Members subjected to combined axial load

and bending
Common Structures 3.4 Column buckling stresses
2.1 Structures supporting the drilling derrick Section 4

2.2 Helicopter deck
Welding, Workmanship and
2.3 Bulwarks and guard rails Inspection
2.4 Means of access 4.1 General
2.5 Anti-fouling systems 4.2 Thickness in excess of 50 mm
2.6 Protective coatings of dedicated seawater 4.3 Extent of inspection of welds

ballast tanks
Section 5
Towing Arrangements

Page 5 of 10
___________________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 7
Self-Elevating Drilling Units
Section 1 Section 2
General Structural Considerations
1.1 Application 2.1 General
1.2 Wave clearance 2.2 Legs
1.3 Sea bed conditions 2.3 Structure in way of jacking or other elevating
arrangements
1.4 Safety against overturning
2.4 Bottom mat
1.5 Preload capability
1.6 Field transit moves

Chapter 8
Column Stabilized Drilling Units
Section 1 Section 2
1.2 Wave clearance 2.2 Upper structure
2.3 Columns, lower hulls and footings
2.4 Structural redundancy
Chapter 9
Surface Type Drilling Units
Section 1 Section 2
2.2 Strength in way of drilling well and large

hatches
2.3 Concentrated loads

Chapter 10
Temporary Mooring Equipment and Position Keeping Systems and

Equipment
Section 1 Section 3
General Position Keeping Systems and

Equipment - Anchoring Systems
1.1 Application
3.1 General
Section 2 3.2 Design
Temporary Mooring Equipment 3.3 Equipment
2.1 Anchors, chain cables, wire ropes and

windlass
Chapter 11
Hazardous Areas
Section 1 2.2 Openings, access and ventilation conditions

affecting the extent of hazardous zones
General
Section 3
1.1 General
Ventilation
Section 2
3.1 General
Classification of Areas 3.2 Ventilation of hazardous areas
2.1 General Section 4
Dangerous Goods

Page 7 of 10
___________________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 12
Machinery
Section 1 Section 4
General Bilge System
1.1 Scope 4.1 General
1.2 Machinery installations - Inclinations 4.2 Size of bilge main
1.3 Jacking systems 4.3 Size of bilge branch suctions
1.4 Machinery for non-self-propelled drilling 4.4 Size of bilge pumps

units
4.5 Chainlockers
1.5 Machinery for self-propelled drilling units
4.6 Void compartments
1.6 Periodical unattended machinery spaces for
all types of units 4.7 Bilge alarm
1.7 Machinery installations in hazardous areas 4.8 Bilge suctions from hazardous areas
1.8 Diving systems 4.9 Additional requirements for column

stabilized drilling units
Section 2
4.10 Additional requirements for periodically
unattended machinery spaces
Piping Systems
Section 5
2.1 General
2.2 Valve arrangements Tank Vents, Overflow and Sounding

Arrangements
Section 3
Ballast Systems for Column 5.1 General

Stabilized Drilling Units 5.2 Vent size
3.1 General 5.3 Sounding arrangements
3.2 Capacity
Section 6
3.3 System arrangement
Flammable Oils
3.4 Operation in damaged condition
3.5 Control features 6.1 General
6.2 Fuel storage for helicopter facilities
6.3Arrangements for oil fuel, lubricating oil and

other flammable oils

Section 7 Section 8
Steam Pipe Systems Air Pressure Systems
7.1 General 8.1 General
8.2 Starting air systems
Chapter 13
Electrical Installations
Section 1 4.2 For self-propelled drilling units
4.3 Starting arrangements for emergency

General generators
1.1 Scope Section 5

1.2 Design and construction
Precautions against Shock, Fire and
1.3 Cathodic protection other Hazards of Electrical Origin
1.4 Alternative design and arrangements
Section 2 Section 6
Cables and Electrical Equipment in Emergency Shutdown Facilities

Hazardous Areas
6.1 Emergency conditions due to drilling
operations
Section 3 6.2 Equipment remaining operational after

emergency shutdown
Main Source of Power
Section 7
3.1 For non-self-propelled drilling units
Alarms and Internal Communication
3.2 For self-propelled drilling units
Section 4 Annex – 1
Emergency Source of Power List of IEC Standards
4.1 For non-self-propelled drilling units

Page 9 of 10
___________________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 14
Safety Features
Section 1 Section 5
General Fire and Gas Detection and Alarm

Systems
1.1 Fire safety
1.2 Fire control plan 5.1 Fire detection and alarm systems
5.2 Combustible gas detection and alarm

Section 2 systems
Structural Fire Protection 5.3 Hydrogen sulphide detection and alarm

system
2.1 General
Section 6
2.2 Fire integrity of bulkheads and decks
Fire Fighting Water Supply
2.3 Protection of accommodation spaces,
service spaces and control stations
6.1 Fire pumps
Section 3 6.2 Pressure
Prevention of Fire 6.3 Nozzles
3.1 Fire protection materials 6.4 Supply
3.2 Smoke generation and toxicity 6.5 Additional requirements for periodically
3.3 Ventilation
6.6 International shore connection
3.4 Arrangements in machinery and working
spaces
Section 7
3.5 Storage of gas cylinders
Other Fire Fighting Arrangements
Section 4 7.1 General
Fire Protection of Ventilation Ducts 7.2 Fire-extinguishing arrangement in machinery

spaces and in spaces containing fired processes
4.1 Materials
7.3 Fixed fire extinguishing systems on drilling
4.2 Duct penetrations areas
4.3 Arrangements of ducts 7.4 Fixed fire extinguishing systems on mud

processing area
4.4 Exhaust ducts form galley ranges
7.5 Portable fire extinguishers in
accommodation, service and working spaces

7.6 Fire-fighters’ outfits 9.3 Additional requirements for helicopter

facilities with refueling capabilities
7.7 Recharging of air cylinders
7.8 Additional requirements for periodically Section 10

Operational Readiness and
Section 8 Maintenance
10.1 General
Escape
10.2 Operational readiness
8.1 Means of escape
10.3 Maintenance, testing and inspections
8.2 Emergency escape breathing devices
8.3 Respiratory protection equipment for Section 11

hydrogen sulphide
Alarms
Section 9 11.1 General alarms
11.2 Mud system level alarms

Fire Fighting Equipment for
Helicopter Facilities 11.3 Ventilation system alarm
9.1 General 11.4 Public address
9.2 Fire fighting arrangements

Page 1 of 19
___________________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 1
General
Contents
Section
1 General Information
2 Definitions
3 Classification Regulations
4 Classification of Drilling Units Built under the Survey of Indian Register of Shipping
5 Classification of Drilling Units not Built under the Survey of
Section 1
General Information
1.1 Indian Register of Shipping

1 Director being the Director General of
1.1.1 Indian Register of Shipping (hereinafter Shipping, Ministry of Surface Transport,
referred to as "IRS") was incorporated in 1975 Govt. of India
as a Public Limited Company under Section 25
of the Indian Companies Act, 1956 for the 1 Director representing Ship Design
purpose of providing amongst other things a Research and Development Institutions
faithful and accurate classification of mercantile
shipping classed with it, to approve designs of, 1 Director representing Manufacturers of
to survey and to issue reports on mercantile and Marine Engines/General Engineering
non mercantile ships, hovercrafts, hydrofoils etc; Goods
all within the scope of classification described in
the Rules. This Section contains General 1 Director representing Indian Navy/Coast
Regulations which have been adopted by IRS Guard
for its governance.
1 Director being a person of eminence
1.1.2 The management of the affairs of IRS are from the field of Law
carried out under the direction and control of the
Board of Directors (hereinafter referred to as the 3 Directors being persons of eminence
'Board'), in accordance with the provisions of its from any industry allied with maritime
Memorandum and Articles of Association. activities
1.1.3 The Board of Directors shall consist of 1 Managing Director being full-time
representative of the interests of various employee appointed by the Board of
members of the Company and those concerned Directors.
with shipping in general as under:
The composition of the Board as above is to be
3 Directors representing Indian in accordance with the Articles of Association of
Shipowners IRS (as may be amended from time to time).
2 Directors representing Indian 1.1.4 The Board shall consist of not less than six
Shipbuilders and not more than fifteen Directors. The Board
of Directors shall elect one of its members to be
1 Director representing General Insurance Chairman of the Board of Directors.
Corporation of India and other Indian
underwriters

Chapter 1 General
Page 2 of 19
1.1.5 The Board is to appoint a Sub-Committee

of Classification representing concerned 1 Other Marine Engine Builders
interests.
6 Shipbuilders
1.1.6 The Board is to appoint the Chairman of
the Sub-Committee of Classification and the 1 Indian Institution of Naval
Managing Director, IRS to be 'ex- officio' Architects
member of the Sub-Committee of Classification.
1 Institution of Marine
1.1.7 The employees of IRS are to be appointed Technologists
by and be under the direction of the Board.
1 Institute of Marine Engineers
1.1.8 The Surveyors of IRS are not to be (India)
permitted without the special sanction of the
Board of Directors to receive any fee, gratuity or 1 Company of Master Mariners
reward whatsoever, for their own use or benefit,
for any service performed by them in their 1 Directorate General of Shipping
capacity as Surveyors to IRS, except on pain of
immediate dismissal. 1 National Ship Design &
Research Centre
1.1.9 The Funds and Accounts are to be under
the authority and control of the Board of 4 Indian National Shipowners
Directors. Association
1.2 Fees 1 Institution of Engineers (India)
1.2.1 Fees will be charged for all surveys and for 1 Ex-Officio - Managing Director
other services rendered by IRS or any of its of IRS
publications in accordance with established
scales. Traveling expenses incurred by the 1.3.4 In addition to the foregoing, the Technical
Surveyors in connection with such services are Committee may co-opt to the main body other
also chargeable. members of high managerial positions in Ship
Building and Engineering, Naval Architecture,
1.3 Technical committee Marine Insurance, Steel Making, etc.
1.3.1 The Board is to appoint a Technical 1.3.5 Nomination of all members to the
Committee whose function will be to consider:- Technical Committee to be subject to
confirmation by the Board.
a) Formulation of Technical Rules for
Classification Surveys, building of ships, 1.3.6 The Technical Committee can appoint
their machinery and equipment. panels from amongst its body to which
representatives of any organisation or industry
b) Important alterations to Rules once framed or individuals specialised in relevant disciplines
as may be required from time to time. could be co-opted for the purpose of considering
any particular Technical problem or area of
1.3.2 All decisions of the Technical Committee Rules.
including amendments and/or additions to the
Rules for classification surveys and building of 1.3.7 The Board of Directors to appoint
ships' hull, their machinery and equipment to be biennially, the Chairman of the Technical
reported to the Board of Directors. Committee and the Technical Committee to
appoint from their own body biennially a Vice-
1.3.3 The Technical Committee to be constituted Chairman. The same members are not to be
as follows: eligible to hold office of Chairman or Vice-
Chairman, as the case may be, for more than
Number of two terms in succession unless on the occasion
Members Nominees/Representatives of of the third term, the appointing body approves
of their continuation by a majority of at least
3 Board of Directors of IRS three-fourths of the members present. The
appointment of Vice-Chairman to be confirmed
1 Marine Engine Unit of by the Board of Directors.
M/s. Garden Reach Ship-
builders and Engineers Ltd.

Page 3 of 19
___________________________________________________________________________________
1.3.8 The terms of office of all members to be approval of the Managing Director, be supplied
not more than four years, one-fourth of all to Owners or their representatives
members (including those co-opted) to retire at
the end of each calender year. The members so 1.5 Register of drilling units
retiring being those who have been longest in
office since their last nomination and such 1.5.1 The names of drilling units, the character
members to be eligible for re-nomination for a of class notation assigned together with other
second term. Unless specially so authorised by relevant useful information for drilling units
the Board of Directors, no member other than classed with IRS or registered in India, will be
Chairman and/or Vice- Chairman, who has included in a separate part of the Register of
served for two periods of nomination, to be Ships which is printed annually for use of
eligible for re-nomination for a third term until subscribers.
after the expiration of at least one year. In the
event of any vacancy occurring before the 1.6 Liability
expiration of the normal term of office, a
representative to be nominated to fill the 1.6.1 Whilst Indian Register of Shipping
vacancy from the same group/body/institution (hereinafter referred to as IRS) and its
and for such nominee the date of his nomination Board/Committees use their best endeavours to
by the respective body to be considered as date ensure that the functions of IRS are properly
of his joining the Technical Committee for carried out, in providing services, information or
purposes of his retirement by rotation. advice, neither IRS nor any of its servants or
agents warrants the accuracy of any information
1.3.9 The meeting of the Technical Committee or advice supplied. Except as set out herein,
to be convened as often and at such time and neither IRS nor any of its servants or agents (on
place as may appear necessary, but there shall behalf of each of whom IRS has agreed this
be at least two meetings in each year. clause) shall be liable for any loss damage or
expense whatever sustained by any person due
1.3.10 The members desiring to propose to any act or omission or error of whatsoever
alterations in, or additions to the Rules for the nature and howsoever caused of IRS, its
classification, survey or building of ship (hull and servants or agents or due to any inaccuracy of
machinery) shall give notice of such proposals whatsoever nature and howsoever caused in
to the Secretary. Every meeting to be convened any information or advice given in any way
by notice from the Secretary, if possible one whatsoever by or on behalf of IRS, even if held
month before the date of the meeting and the to amount to a breach of warranty.
Secretary to send to each member an Agenda Nevertheless, if any person uses services of
paper as soon as possible thereafter. IRS, or relies on any information or advice given
by or on behalf of IRS and suffers loss damage
1.3.11 The Board of Directors reserves to or expenses thereby which is proved to have
themselves the right of altering, adding to or been due to any negligent act omission or error
rescinding any/or all of the above terms of of IRS its servants or agents or any negligent
reference including the dissolution of the inaccuracy in information or advice given by or
Technical Committee. on behalf of IRS then IRS will pay compensation
to such person for his proved loss up to but not
1.4 Survey reports exceeding the amount of the fee charged by IRS
for that particular service, information or advice.
1.4.1 All reports of survey are to be made by the
Surveyors according to the form prescribed and 1.6.2 Any notice of claim for loss, damage or
submitted for consideration of the Board or the expense as referred to in 1.6.1 shall be made in
Sub-Committee of Classification, but the writing to IRS Head Office within six months of
character assigned by the latter is to be reported the date when the service, information or advice
to the Board. The Board may, in specified was first provided, failing which all the rights to
instances, vest in the Managing Director any such claim shall be forfeited and IRS shall
discretionary powers to act on its behalf, and all be relieved and discharged from all liabilities.
such actions being reported to the Board at its
subsequent meeting. 1.7 IACS QSCS audits
1.4.2 The reports of the Surveyors shall, subject 1.7.1 The surveys required by the regulations,
to the approval of the Managing Director, be and conducted by IRS may be subject to Audit
open to inspection of the Owner and any other by IACS as per the requirements of Quality
person authorised in writing by the Owner. System Certification Scheme and for this
Copies of the reports will, subject to the purpose, IACS auditors are to be given the

Chapter 1 General
Page 4 of 19
necessary access to the drilling unit, shipyard or 1.11 Requirements for service suppliers
works when requested by IRS.
1.11.1Firms providing following services on
1.8 Access of Surveyor to drilling units, behalf of the Owner, the results of which are
shipyards or works used by Surveyors in making decision affecting
classification and/or affecting statutory
1.8.1 The Surveyors are to be given free access certifications, are to be approved by IRS in
to drilling units classed with IRS as well as to accordance with the laid down procedures.
shipyards, works, etc. so as to perform their
duties, and are to receive adequate assistance a) Class services
for this purpose.
- Firms engaged in thickness measurements
1.9 Compliance with statutory requirements on ships
1.9.1 Whilst the requirements of these Rules are - Firms engaged in tightness testing of
considered to meet the requirements of the hatches with ultrasonic equipment
Code for the Construction and Equipment of
Mobile Offshore Drilling Units, (MODU Code) - Firms carrying out in-water survey of ships
2009, consideration should be given to any and mobile offshore units.
relevant requirements of the National Authority
of the country in which the drilling unit is to be b) Statutory services
registered.
- Firms engaged in surveys and maintenance
The MODU Code 2009 applies to mobile of fire extinguishing equipment and systems
offshore drilling units, the keels of which are laid
or which are at a similar stage of construction on - Firms engaged in service on inflatable
or after 1 January 2012. liferafts, inflatable lifejackets, hydrostatic
release units, etc.
1.10 Responding to Port State Control
- Firms engaged in the servicing and testing
1.10.1When requested by Port State and upon of radio communication equipment
concurrence by the vessel's owner/master IRS
Surveyors would attend onboard a ship in order - Firms engaged in inspection and testing of
to assist in the rectification of reported centralised gas welding and cutting
deficiencies or other discrepancies that affect or equipment
may affect classification or the statutory
certificates issued by IRS. The owner and the - Firms engaged in surveys and maintenance
vessel's flag state will be notified of such of self contained breathing apparatus.
attendance and survey. IRS Surveyors will also
cooperate with Port States by providing 1.11.2 For statutory services, approvals done by
inspectors with background information. the flag Administration itself or duly authorised
organisations acting on behalf of the flag
Administration may be accepted.
Section 2
Definitions
The definitions given below, in alphabetical 3) Administration means the Government of

order, shall apply for the purpose of these the State whose flag the unit is entitled to fly.
Rules.
4) Certificate means Mobile Offshore Drilling
1) 1974 SOLAS Convention means the Unit Safety Certificate.
International Convention for the Safety of Life at
Sea, 1974, as amended. 5) Coastal State means the Government of the
State exercising administrative control over the
2) 1966 Load Line Convention means the drilling operations of the unit.
International Convention on Load Lines, 1966.

Page 5 of 19
___________________________________________________________________________________
6) Dead ship condition is the condition under d) Moulded draught (T)[m]
which the main propulsion plant, boilers and The moulded draught is the vertical distance
auxiliaries are not in operation due to the from the moulded base line to the assigned
absence of power. load waterline. Certain components of a unit's
structure, machinery or equipment may
7) Dimensions extend below the moulded base line.
a) Length (L)[m] e) Moulded base line

The moulded base line is a horizontal line
- For surface type drilling units L is to be extending through the upper surface of the
taken as 96% of the total length on a bottom plating.
waterline at 85% of the least moulded
depth (D) measured from the top of the 8) Diving system is the plant and equipment
keel, or the length from the foreside of necessary for the safe conduct of diving
the stem to the axis of the rudder stock operations from a mobile offshore drilling unit.
on that waterline, if that be greater. In
units designed with a rake of keel, the 9) Down flooding means any flooding of the
waterline on which this length is interior or any part of the buoyant structure of a
measured should be parallel to the unit through openings which cannot be closed
designed waterline. weathertight, watertight or which are required for
operational reasons to be left open in all
- For self-elevating drilling units L is to be weather conditions, as appropriate for the intact
taken as the distance between the and damage stability criteria.
inside of the shell plating at the fore and
after ends. 10) Drilling Units ( Types of )
- For Column stabilized drilling units L is a) Self-elevating drilling units have hulls with
to be taken as the maximum distance sufficient buoyancy to safely transport the
between the inside of the shell plating at unit to the desired location, after which the
the fore and after ends of the primary hull is raised to a predetermined elevation
hull structure which is projected to the above the sea surface on its legs, which are
center line of the hull. supported on the seabed. Drilling equipment
and supplies may be transported on the
b) Breadth (B)[m] unit, or may be added to the unit in its
elevated position. The legs of such units
- For surface type and self-elevating may penetrate the sea bed, may be fitted
drilling units B is to be taken as the with enlarged section or footings to reduce
horizontal distance between outsides of penetration, or may be attached to a bottom
frames at the broadest part of the hull. pad or mat.
- For Column stabilized drilling units B is b) Column stabilized drilling units depend
to be taken as the horizontal distance upon the buoyancy of widely spaced
between measured perpendicularly to columns for flotation and stability for all
the length at the broadest part of the afloat modes of operation or in the raising or
primary hull structure. lowering of the unit, as may be applicable.
The columns are connected at their top to
c) Depth (D)[m] an upper structure supporting the drilling
equipment. Lower hulls or footings may be
- For surface type and self-elevating provided at the bottom of the columns for
drilling units D is to be taken as the additional buoyancy or to provide sufficient
vertical distance measured from the top are to support the unit on the seabed.
of the keel to the top of beam of the Bracing members of tubular or structural
uppermost continuous deck at side sections may be used to connect the
measured at middle of L. columns, lower hulls or footings and to
support the upper structure. Drilling
- For Column stabilized drilling units D is operations may be carried out in the floating
to be taken as the vertical distance condition, in which condition the unit is
between the top of bottom plating of the described as a semisubmersible, or when
lower hull or footing, to the top of beam the unit is supported by the sea bed, in
of the uppermost continuous deck at which condition the unit is described as a
side measured at middle of L. submersible. A semisubmersible unit may
be designed of operate either floating or

Chapter 1 General
Page 6 of 19
supported by the sea bed, provided each 16) Low flame spread means that the surface
type of operation has been found to be thus described will adequately restrict the
satisfactory. spread of flame, this being determined to the
satisfaction of IRS by an established test
c) Surface type drilling units procedure.
i) Ship type drilling units are seagoing 17) Materials

ship-shaped units having a displacement-
type hull or hulls, of the single, catamaran a) Non-combustible material means a
or trimaran types, which have been material which neither burns nor gives off
designed or converted for drilling flammable vapours in sufficient quantity for
operations in the floating condition. Such self- ignition when heated to approximately
types have propulsion machinery. 750C, this being determined to the
satisfaction of IRS by an established test
ii) Barge type drilling units are seagoing procedure. Any other material is a
units having a displacement type hulls, combustible material.
which have been designed or converted
for drilling operations in the floating b) Steel or equivalent materials. Where the
condition. These units have no propulsion words "steel or equivalent material" occur,
machinery. "equivalent material" means any non-
combustible material which, by itself or due
d) Other types of drilling units to insulation provided, has structural and
Units which are designed as mobile offshore integrity properties equivalent to steel at the
drilling units and which do not fall into the above end of the applicable standard fire test (e.g.
mentioned categories will be treated on an aluminium alloy with appropriate insulation).
individual basis and be assigned an appropriate
classification designation. 18) Mobile offshore drilling unit or unit as
used herein is intended to mean any mobile
11) Fire Test offshore structure or drilling unit, whether
designed for operation afloat or supported by
a) A standard fire test is a test as defined in the sea bed, built in accordance with the
regulation II-2/3.2 of the 1974 SOLAS requirements and of these rules, and includes
Convention. the entire structure and components covered by
the requirements. The term 'drilling unit' as used
12) Oil fuel unit is the equipment used for the herein means any unit intended for use in
preparation of oil fuel for delivery to an oil-fired offshore drilling operations for the exploration or
boiler, or equipment used for the preparation for exploitation of the subsea resources. The term
delivery of heated oil to an internal combustion 'self-propelled unit' as used herein refers to a
engine, and includes any oil pressure pumps, unit which is designed for unassisted passage.
filters and heaters dealing with oil at a pressure All other units are considered as non-self-
more than 1.8 bar. propelled.
13) Gas-tight door is a solid, close-fitting door 19) Modes of operation A mode of operation is
designed to resist the passage of gas under a condition or manner in which a unit may
normal atmospheric conditions. operate or function while on location or in transit.
Insofar as the rules are concerned, the
14) Industrial machinery and components are approved modes of operation of a unit should
the machinery and components which are used include the following:
in connection with the drilling operation.
a) Operating conditions: Conditions wherein
15) Light ship weight a unit is on location for purposes of drilling
is defined as the weight of the complete unit with or other similar operations, and combined
all its permanently installed machinery, environmental and operational loadings are
equipment and outfit, including permanent within the appropriate design limits
ballast, spare parts normally retained on board established for such operations. Unit may
and liquids in machinery and piping to their be either afloat or supported on the seabed,
normal working levels, but does not include as applicable.
liquids in storage or reserve supply tanks, items
of consumable or variable loads, stores or crew b) Severe storm conditions: A condition
and their effects. during which a unit may be subjected to the
most severe environmental loadings for
which the unit is designed. Drilling or similar
Page 7 of 19
___________________________________________________________________________________
operations may have been discontinued due
to the severity of the environmental b) Main source of electrical power is a
loadings. Unit may be either afloat or source intended to supply electrical power
supported on the seabed, as applicable. for all services necessary for maintaining
the unit in normal operational and habitable
c) Transit conditions: All unit movements conditions.
from one geographical location to another,
including the stages of retrieval and jacking. 25) Ship Spaces
20) Normal operational and habitable a) Accommodation spaces are those used
conditions means: for public spaces, corridors, lavatories,
cabins, offices, hospitals, cinemas, games
a) conditions under which the unit as a whole and hobbies rooms; pantries containing no
its machinery, services, means and aids cooking appliances and similar spaces.
ensuring safe navigation when under way, Public spaces are those portions of the
safety when in the industrial mode, fire and accommodation which are used for halls,
flooding safety, internal and external dining rooms, lounges and similar
communications and signals, means of permanently enclosed spaces.
escape and winches for rescue boats, as
well as the means of ensuring the minimum b) Control stations are those spaces in which
comfortable conditions of habitability, are in the unit's radio or main navigating
working order and functioning normally; and equipment or the emergency source of
power is located or where the fire recording
b) drilling operations. or fire control equipment or the dynamical
positioning control system is centralized or
21) Organization means the International where a fire- extinguishing system serving
Maritime Organization (IMO). various locations is situated. In the case of
column-stabilized units a centralized ballast
22) Rescue boat is an easily maneuvered control station is a "control station".
power boat capable of rapid launching and
adequate for quick recovery of a man overboard c) Enclosed spaces are spaces delineated by
and towing a liferaft away from immediate floors, bulkheads and/or decks which may
danger. have doors or windows.
23) Ship Divisions d) Hazardous areas are all those areas

where, due to the possible presence of a
a) "A" class divisions are those divisions as flammable atmosphere arising from the
defined in regulation II-2/3.3 of the 1974 drilling operations, the use without proper
SOLAS Convention. consideration of machinery or electrical
equipment may lead to fire hazard or
b) "B" class divisions are those divisions as explosion.
defined in regulation II-2/3.4 of the 1974
SOLAS Convention. e) Machinery spaces of category A are all
spaces which contain internal combustion-
c) "C" class divisions are divisions type machinery used either:
constructed of approved non-combustible
materials. They need meet neither f) for main propulsion; or
requirements relative to the passage of
smoke and flame nor limitations relative to i) for other purposes where such
the temperature rise. machinery has in the aggregate a total
power of not less than 375 kW; or
d) Continuous "B" class ceilings or linings which contain any oil-fired boiler or oil fuel
are those "B" class ceilings or linings which unit; and trunks to such spaces.
terminate only at an "A" or "B" class division.
g) Machinery spaces are all machinery
24) Sources of Power spaces of category A and all other spaces
containing propelling machinery, boilers and
a) Emergency source of electrical power is other fired processes, oil fuel units, steam
a source of electrical power intended to and internal combustion engines,
supply the necessary services in the event generators and major electrical machinery,
of failure of the main source of electrical oil filling stations, refrigerating, stabilizing,
power. ventilation and air- conditioning machinery

Chapter 1 General
Page 8 of 19
and similar spaces; and trunks to such electrical equipment and connected
spaces. pump;
h) Semi-enclosed locations are locations iii) other hydraulic gear, a driving

where natural conditions of ventilation are engine and connected pump.
notably different from those on open decks
due to the presence of structures such as 28) Survival craft are craft capable of removing
roofs, windbreaks and bulkheads and which persons from a unit to be abandoned and
are so arranged that dispersion of gas may capable of sustaining persons until retrieval is
not occur. completed.
i) Service spaces are those used for galleys, 29) Switchboards

pantries containing cooking appliances,
lockers and store-rooms, workshops other a) Emergency switchboard is a switchboard
than those forming part of the machinery which, in the event of failure of the main
spaces, and similar spaces and trunks to system of electrical power supply, is directly
such spaces. supplied by the emergency source of
electrical power and/or the transitional
j) Working spaces are those open or source of emergency power and is intended
enclosed spaces containing equipment and to distribute electrical energy to the
processes, associated with drilling emergency services.
operations, which are not included in 1.3.30
or 1.3.32. b) Main switchboard is a switchboard directly
supplied by the main source of electrical
26) Speed power and intended to distribute electrical
energy to the unit's services.
a) Maximum ahead service speed is the
greatest speed which the unit is designed to 30) Water depth as used herein is the vertical
maintain in service at sea at its deepest distance from the sea bed to the mean low
seagoing draught. water level plus the height of astronomical and
storm tides.
b) Maximum astern speed is the speed which
it is estimated the unit can attain at the 31) Watertight means that capability of
designed maximum astern power at its preventing the passage of water through
deepest seagoing draught. structure in any direction under the head of
water for which the surrounding structure is
27) Steering Gear designed.
a) Main steering gear is the machinery, the 32) Weathertight means that in any sea
steering gear power units, if any, and conditions water will not penetrate into the unit.
ancillary equipment and the means of
applying torque to the rudder stock, e.g. 33) Anniversary date means the day and
tiller or quadrant, necessary for effecting month of each year which will correspond to the
movement of the rudder for the purpose of date of expiry of the certificate.
steering the unit under normal service
conditions. 34) Column stabilized unit is a unit with the
main deck connected to the underwater hull or
b) Auxiliary steering gear is the equipment footings by columns or caissons.
which is provided for effecting movement of
the rudder for the purpose of steering the 35) Continuous “B” class ceilings or linings
unit in the event of failure of the main are those “B” class ceilings or linings which
steering gear. terminate only at an “A” or “B” class division.
c) Steering gear power unit means, in the 36) Control stations are those spaces in which
case of: the unit’s radio or main navigating equipment or
the emergency source of power is located or
i) electric steering gear, an electric where the fire recording or fire control
motor and its associated electrical equipment or the dynamic positioning control
equipment; system is centralized or where a fire-
extinguishing system servicing various locations
ii) electro-hydraulic steering gear, an is situated. In the case of column-stabilized units
electric motor and its associated

Page 9 of 19
___________________________________________________________________________________
a centralized ballast control station is a “control
station”. 41) FTP Code means the International Code for
Application of Fire Test Procedures, adopted by
37) Dead ship condition is the condition under the Maritime Safety Committee of the
which the main propulsion plant, boilers and Organization by resolution MSC.61(67), as
auxiliaries are not in operation due to the amended.
absence of power.
42) Helideck is a purpose-built helicopter
38) Depth for freeboard has the same meaning landing platform located on a mobile offshore
as defined in regulation 3 of the 1988 LL drilling unit (MODU).
Protocol.
43) Self-elevating unit is a unit with movable
39) Freeboard is the distance measured legs capable of raising its hull above the surface
vertically downwards amidships from the upper of the sea and lowering it back into the sea.
edge of the deck line to the upper edge of the
related load line. 44) Surface unit is a unit with a ship or barge-
type displacement hull of single or multiple hull
40) FSS Code means the International Code for construction intended for operation in the
Fire Safety Systems, adopted by the Maritime floating condition.
Safety Committee of the Organization by
resolution MSC.98(73), as amended.
Section 3
Classification Regulations
3.1 General from those of the Rules of IRS, IRS may permit
the requirements of the corresponding Society
3.1.1 When a drilling unit is assigned a specific being applied, in so far as they are equivalent in
Character of Class by Indian Register of purpose or are no less stringent than the IRS
Shipping, it implies that IRS has been satisfied rule requirement.
that the said drilling unit meets, for this particular
class, with these Rules and Regulations or 3.1.5 The classification of a drilling unit with IRS
requirements equivalent thereto for both hull and does not exempt the owners from compliance
machinery. The drilling unit will continue to be with any additional and/or more stringent
classed with IRS so long as she is found, upon requirements issued by the Administration of the
examination at the prescribed annual and state whose flag the drilling unit is entitled to fly
periodical surveys, to be maintained in a fit and and provision for their application.
efficient condition and in accordance with the
Periodical Survey requirements of these Rules. 3.1.6 It is the responsibility of the Owners to
Classification will be conditional upon ensure that the operating and maintenance
compliance with IRS requirements for both hull instructions/manuals for the drilling unit's
and machinery. machinery equipment essential to the safe
operation of the drilling unit are available in a
3.1.2 The Rules are framed on the under- language understandable by those officers and
standing that drilling units will be properly crew members who are required to understand
handled; they do not, unless stated in the class such information/instructions in the performance
notation, provide for special distributions or of their duties.
concentrations of loading and that drilling units
will not be operated in environmental conditions 3.2 Application of Rules
more severe than those agreed for design basis
and approval. 3.2.1 Unless directed otherwise by IRS, no new
Regulations or amendments to the Rules
3.1.3 Compliance to applicable International relating to the character of classification or class
Conventions and National requirements is a notation is to be applied to the existing drilling
prerequisite of classification. units.
3.1.4 Where a drilling unit holds dual 3.2.2 Unless directed otherwise by IRS, no new
classification with IRS and the periodical survey Rules and Regulations or amendments to the
requirements of the corresponding Society differ existing Rules & Regulations become applicable

Chapter 1 General
Page 10 of 19
within 6 months after the date of issue nor after

the approval of original midship section or 3.6.3 Service Restriction Notation: In case of
equivalent structural plans. Where it is proposed units which are not designed to meet the full
to use existing previously approved plans for a criteria for unrestricted service, an appropriate
new contract, written application is to be made service restriction notation will be appended to
to IRS. the class notation.
3.3 Scope of classification 3.6.4 Position Mooring Equipment and

Systems Notation Class notation PM would be
3.3.1 Classification covers drilling unit's hull, assigned when the position mooring equipment
appendages and machinery including electrical and systems provided on the drilling unit comply
systems to the extent as specified in these with the rules.
Rules & Regulations.
3.7 Class notations - Machinery
3.4 Interpretations of the Rules
3.7.1 The class notation IY assigned to drilling
3.4.1 The correct interpretation of the units indicates that its machinery as covered by
requirements contained in the Rules and other Chapters 12 to 14 and its installation meet the
Regulations is the sole responsibility and at the applicable Rule requirements.
sole discretion of IRS.
3.7.2 The distinguishing mark inserted
3.5 Character of classification before the class notation IY is assigned to new
drilling units where the machinery as covered by
3.5.1 The following Characters and symbols are Chapters 12 to 14 has been manufactured and
assigned by IRS to indicate classification of installed under special survey of IRS.
Steel Drilling Units.
3.8 Materials
3.5.2 Character SUL assigned to sea-going
drilling units indicates that the drilling unit, its 3.8.1 The materials used in the construction of
machinery and equipment (i.e. anchors, chain hull and machinery intended for classification, or
cable and hawsers) meet the Rule requirements in the repair of drilling unit already classed, are
for assignment of this Character of Class. to be of good quality and free from defects and
are to be tested in accordance with the relevant
3.5.3 The distinguishing mark inserted Rules. The steel is to be manufactured by an
before Characters of Class or Class Notation(s) approved process at works recognized* by IRS.
is assigned to new drilling units constructed Alternatively, tests to the satisfaction of IRS will
under special survey of IRS in compliance with be required to demonstrate the suitability of the
the Rules to the satisfaction of IRS. steel.
3.6 Class notations - Hull * Consideration may be given by IRS at their

sole discretion to recognize the works on the
3.6.1 When requested by an Owner and agreed approved list of Classification Societies with
to by IRS or when considered necessary by IRS, whom IRS currently has Dual Class Agreements
class notation(s) as detailed below will be for this purpose. Such approval of works is
appended to the character of classification. intended for limited periods only and may call for
such tests and/or examination to be carried out
3.6.2 Type Notation: Depending on the type of by the Surveyors of IRS as may be decided by
the drilling unit (see Section 2), one of the IRS from time to time.
following type notations will be assigned:
3.9 Request for surveys
- Self-elevating drilling unit
3.9.1 It is the responsibility of the Builders or
- Column stabilised drilling unit Owners, as applicable, to inform the Surveyors
of IRS in the port at which the surveys for
- Surface type drilling unit (Self propelled) supervision during new construction or drilling
units in service are to be undertaken and to
- Surface type drilling unit (Non-self- ensure that all surveys for issue of class
propelled) certificate for new construction, and
maintenance of class for drilling units in service
- Other types of drilling units- In case of are carried out.
special purpose units which do not fall in
the above mentioned categories.

Page 11 of 19
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.10 Repairs 3.13 Appeal from Surveyors' recommen-
dations
3.10.1 Any repairs to the hull, machinery and
equipment either as a result of damage or wear 3.13.1 If the recommendations of the Surveyors
and tear which are required for the maintenance are considered in any case to be unnecessary
of drilling unit's class are to be carried out under or unreasonable, appeal may be made to IRS,
the inspection of and to the satisfaction of the who may direct a special examination to be
Surveyors. held.
3.10.2 Where a drilling unit is damaged to an 3.14 Certificates

extent resulting in towage outside port limits, it
shall be the Owners' responsibility to notify IRS 3.14.1 Certificates of Class will be issued to
at the first practicable opportunity. Builders or Owners when the required reports
on completion of Special Surveys of new drilling
3.10.3 Where such repairs are effected at a port units or of existing drilling units submitted for
where there is no Surveyor of IRS, the drilling classification have been received from the
unit is to be surveyed by one of its Surveyors at Surveyors and approved by IRS.
the earliest opportunity.
3.14.2 Certificates of class maintenance in
3.10.4 Where repairs to hull, machinery or respect of completed periodical special surveys
equipment, which affect or may affect of hull and machinery will also be issued to
classification, are to be carried out by a riding Owners.
crew, they are to be planned in advance. A
complete repair procedure including the extent 3.14.3 The Surveyors are permitted to issue
of proposed repairs and the need for Surveyor's Interim Certificates to enable a drilling unit,
attendance during the voyage is to be submitted classed with IRS, to proceed on her voyage
to and agreed upon by the Surveyor reasonably provided that, in their opinion, she is in a fit and
in advance. Failure to notify IRS, in advance of efficient condition. Such Certificates will contain
the repairs, may result in suspension of the Surveyors' recommendations for continuance of
drilling unit's class. Class, but in all cases are subject to
confirmation by IRS.
3.11 Alterations
3.14.4 Individual Certificates can also be issued
3.11.1 Any alterations proposed to be carried for propelling machinery, boilers, equipments
out to approved scantlings and arrangements of and fittings which have been manufactured
the hull, machinery or equipment are to meet under IRS Survey and in accordance with these
with the approval of IRS and for this purpose Regulations.
plans and technical particulars are to be
submitted for approval in advance. Such 3.15 Suspension, withdrawal and deletion of
approved alterations are to be carried out under class
the inspection of, and to the satisfaction of, the
Surveyors. 3.15.1 When the class of a drilling unit holding
IRS class, is withdrawn by IRS in consequence
3.12 Date of build of a request from the Owners, the notation
"Class withdrawn at Owners' request" (with
3.12.1 The date of completion of the special date) will be made in the Supplement and the
survey inspection will normally be taken as the notation "Class withdrawn - Owners' request"
date of build to be entered in the Register Book. (with date) will be made in the next reprint of the
Register Of Drilling Units. After one year, the
Where there is a substantial delay between notation will be altered to "Classed IRS until"
completion of construction survey and the (with date).
drilling unit commencing service, the date of
commissioning may be specified on the 3.15.2 When the Regulations as regards
classification certificate. surveys on the hull or equipment or machinery
have not been complied with and the drilling unit
When modifications are carried out on a drilling thereby is not entitled to retain her class, the
unit, the initial date of build remains assigned to class will be withdrawn and the notation "Class
the drilling unit. withdrawn" (with date) will be made in the
Supplement and the notation "IRS Class
withdrawn" (with date) will be made in the next
reprint of the Register Of Drilling Units. After one

Chapter 1 General
Page 12 of 19
year, the notation will be altered to "Classed IRS 3.15.7 In cases where the class has been
until" (with date). suspended by IRS and it becomes apparent that
the owners are not interested in maintaining IRS
3.15.3 The class of a drilling unit is liable to be class, the notation will be amended to withdrawn
withheld or, if already granted, may be status.
withdrawn in case of any non-payment of fees or
expenses chargeable for the service rendered. 3.16 Reclassification of drilling units
3.15.4 Where any drilling unit proceeds to sea 3.16.1 When Owners request for reclassification
with a less freeboard than that approved by IRS of a drilling unit for which the class previously
or when the freeboard marks are placed higher assigned has been withdrawn, IRS will require a
on the drilling unit's sides than the position Special Survey for Reclassification to be held by
assigned or approved by IRS, the drilling unit's the IRS Surveyors. The extent of the survey will
class will be liable to be withdrawn. depend upon the age of the drilling unit and the
circumstances of each case.
3.15.5 When it is found that a drilling unit is
being operated in a manner contrary to that 3.16.2 If the drilling unit is found or placed in
agreed at the time of classification, or is being good and efficient condition in accordance with
operated in conditions or in areas more onerous the requirements of the Rules and Regulations
than those agreed, the class is liable to be at the Special Survey for Reclassification, IRS
suspended or withdrawn. may decide to reinstate her original class or
assign such other class as considered
3.15.6 The class of a drilling unit which has appropriate.
maintained class would be deleted on receipt of
information that it has been scrapped or ceases 3.16.3 The date of reclassification will appear in
to exist, and an appropriate entry would be the supplement to the Register Of Drilling Units
made in the Register of Ships. and the subsequent issue of Register Of Drilling
Units.
Section 4
Classification of Drilling Units Built under the Survey of

4.1 Classification of new constructions IRS reserves the right to request for additional
plans, information or particulars to be submitted.
4.1.1 The request for classification of new
constructions is to be submitted to IRS by the Approval of plans and calculations by IRS does
shipyard or shipowner in the form provided by not relieve the Builders of their responsibility for
IRS. The request is to include complete details the design, construction and installation of the
regarding class notation and statutory various parts, nor does it absolve the Builders
certificates required, where applicable. from their duty of carrying out any alterations or
additions to the various parts on board deemed
4.1.2 Where orders for major machinery and necessary by IRS during construction or
equipment are placed on manufacturer or installation on board or trials.
suppliers, IRS will have to be informed.
Responsibility for compliance with IRS Rules 4.1.4 IRS will assess the production facilities
and Regulations shall be with the and procedures of the shipyard and other
manufacturers/suppliers. manufacturers as to whether they meet the
requirements of the construction Rules.
4.1.3 Plans and particulars as specified in the
Rules will have to be submitted to IRS in 4.1.5 During construction of a drilling unit, IRS
triplicate sufficiently in advance of will ensure by surveys that parts of hull and
commencement of construction. One copy with machinery requiring approval have been
stamp of approval will be returned. Any constructed in compliance with approved
deviation from approved drawings will require to drawings, all required tests and trials are
be approved by IRS prior to execution of work. performed satisfactorily, workmanship is in
compliance with current engineering practices

Page 13 of 19
___________________________________________________________________________________
and welded parts are produced by qualified 4.3 Plans and design data
welders.
4.3.1 Plans showing the scantlings,
4.1.6 All hull, machinery and electrical arrangements and details of the principal parts
installations will be subjected to operational of the structure of each unit to be built under IRS
trials in the presence of IRS Surveyor. Class are to be submitted for approval before
construction commences. These plans are to
4.1.7 On completion of the drilling unit, copies of clearly indicate the scantlings, types and grades
as fitted plans showing the drilling unit as built, of materials, joint details and welding, or other
essential certificates and records, loading methods of connection. These plans are to
manual etc. are to be submitted by the Builder include the following, where applicable:
generally prior to issuance of the Interim
Certificate of Class. - General arrangement;
4.2 Scope - Inboard and outboard profile;
4.2.1 The items listed below, where applicable, - Summary of distributions of fixed and
are covered by these requirements and are variable weights;
subject to approval by IRS :
- Plan indicating design loading for all
- Materials decks;
- Structural strength - Transverse sections showing scantlings;
- Welding - Longitudinal sections showing

scantlings;
- Stability - intact and damaged
- Decks, including helicopter deck;
- Weathertight/watertight integrity
- Framing;
- Temporary or emergency mooring
equipment - Shell plating;
- Jacking system - Watertight bulkheads and flats;
- Propulsion machinery, including shafts - Structural bulkheads and flats;

and propellers
- Tank boundaries with location of
- Steering gear and rudders overflows;
- Auxiliary machinery - Pillars and girders;
- Pumping and piping systems, including - Diagonals and struts;

valves
- Legs;
- Boilers and pressure vessels
- Structure in way of jacking or other
- Electrical installations elevating arrangements;
- Protection against fire and explosion - Stability columns and intermediate

columns;
4.2.2 These Requirements do not cover
structural details of industrial items used - Hulls, pontoons, footings, pads or mats;
exclusively in drilling or related operations. The
assessment of the required holding capacity, - Superstructures and deck houses;
arrangement and operation is position mooring
equipment and dynamic positioning equipment - Arrangement and details of watertight
used for station-keeping activities in connection doors and hatches;
with the unit's operation is the responsibility of
the owner, and is not included in these - Anchor handling arrangements;
requirements.
- Welding details and procedures;

Chapter 1 General
Page 14 of 19
- Circuit breaker setting and fuse ratings

- Lines or offsets;
- Electrical installations in hazardous
- Curves of form or equivalent data; locations
- Cross curves of stability or equivalent - Elevating system material specifications

data;
- Emergency shutdown procedures
- Wind heeling moment curves or
equivalent data; - Generator ratings
- Capacity plan; - Information required by the IRS steel

vessels rules for propulsion machinery,
- Tank sounding tables; main and emergency generators and vital
motors 100 [kW] and over
- Corrosion control arrangements;
- Main and emergency generators and vital
- Methods and locations for non- motors below 100 [kW] rating
destructive testing;
- Propulsion controls, main and emergency
4.3.2 In addition to be above, an arrangement switchboards, distribution panels and panel
plan of watertight compartmentation is to be boards
submitted as early in the design stage as
possible, for review of damage stability. This - Motor and motor control data
drawing is to indicate the watertight bulkheads,
decks, and flats and all openings therein. Doors, - Panels and switchboards
hatches, ventilators, etc., and their means of
closure, are to be indicated. Piping and - Short-circuit analysis and supporting data
ventilation systems are to be shown in sufficient
details to evaluate their effects on the watertight - Steering gear, including control circuits
integrity of the drilling unit after incurring
damage. - Wiring diagrams and details for
Machinery  emergency generator starting
- Plans are to be submitted showing the  fire alarm

arrangements and details or all propulsion
and auxiliary machinery, steering gear,  interior communication systems
boilers and pressure vessels, electrical required by the MODU Rules
systems, jacking or other self-elevating
systems, bilge and ballast systems, fire  intrinsically safe systems
extinguishing systems and other pumps and
piping systems as described in Chapters 12 - Navigation lights
to 14.
Mechanical systems/components
- Electrical systems and components
- Diagrammatic drawing of each system
- A one line diagram of the power system accompanied by lists of material giving size,
wall thickness, maximum working pressure
- A plan showing hazardous locations and and material of valves and fittings
electrical equipment in these locations
together with a listing of equipment - General arrangement of pumps and piping
manufacturers and model numbers and
evidence of certification - Where superheated steam is used,
temperature is to also be given
- Battery data and gas emissions calculations
- A description of the ballast control system
- Booklet of standard (cable and wiring) for column stabilized units
details
- A description and diagrammatic plans of all
- Cable details and grouping criteria piping systems used solely for drilling

Page 15 of 19
___________________________________________________________________________________
operations, including cross connections  non-standard materials, bronze
where applicable with other non-drilling
related systems  non-standard fittings
- All group I piping systems not covered - Steam and exhaust piping
above except for those which form part of
an independently manufactured unit - Vent, sounding and overflow pipe capacity
calculations
- Ballasting calculations for column stabilized
units 4.4 Materials
- Bilge and ballast systems 4.4.1 Unless otherwise specified, these

Requirements are intended for drilling units to
- Boiler-feed systems be constructed of hull structural steel,
manufactured and having the properties as
- Booklet of standard piping details specified in Part 2 of the Rules and Regulations
for the Construction and Classification of Steel
- Compressed air systems Ships. Where it is proposed to use steel or other
material having properties differing from those
- Essential control air systems specified in the foregoing Rules, the
specification and properties of such materials
- Essential sea-water and fresh-water service are to be submitted to IRS for consideration and
systems special approval. Due consideration is to be
given to the ratio of yield to ultimate strength of
- Exhaust piping for internal combustion the materials to be used, and to their suitability
engines and boilers with regard to structural location and to design
temperatures.
- Fire-main and fire-extinguishing systems
4.5 Scantlings
- Fuel-oil-filling, transfer and service systems
4.5.1 Scantlings of the major structural elements
- General arrangement of pumps and piping of the unit are to be determined in accordance
with the Requirements as set forth herein.
- Hydraulic power piping systems Scantlings of structural elements which are
subject to local load only, and which are not
- Non-standard fittings: specifications, cal- considered to be effective components of the
culations and material tests primary structural frame of the unit, shall comply
with the applicable requirements of the Rules
- Non standard materials, bronze and Regulations for the Construction &
Classification of Steel Ships.
- Pumps - performance data and calculations
4.5.2 Scantlings of surface type drilling units are
- Starting air systems to comply with the requirements of Rules and
Regulations for the Construction & Classification
- Systems conveying toxic liquids, low flash of Steel Ships. See also Chapter 6.
point (below 60C, 140F) liquids or
flammable gas 4.5.3 Where the drilling unit is fitted with an
acceptable corrosion protection system, the
- Sanitary systems scantlings may be determined in accordance
with 3.3 in conjunction with allowable stresses
- Specific additional information for: given in Sec. 3, and in which case no corrosion
allowance is required. If scantlings are
 flexible expansion joints in seawater determined from the Rules and Regulations for
systems the Construction & Classification of Steel Ships,
reductions for corrosion protection may be as
 fuel flash point data permitted by the foregoing Rules.
 hydraulic cylinders Where no corrosion protection system is fitted or

where the system is considered by IRS to be
 hydraulic system and components inadequate, an appropriate corrosion allowance
will be required on scantlings determined from
Sec. 3, and no reduction will be permitted on
Chapter 1 General
Page 16 of 19
scantlings determined by the use of the loadings, and the location of downflooding
foregoing Rules. points etc. If permanent ballast is to be
used, location, type, quantities and
4.6 Operating booklet substance used are to be clearly indicated.
4.6 Operating Manuals - Hydrostatic curves or equivalent data.
4.6.1 Operating manuals or equivalent are to be - Tank sounding tables or curves showing
placed on board each drilling unit. The manuals capacities, the vertical, longitudinal and
are to be approved by IRS from the point of view transverse centres of gravity in graduated
of classification requirements covered by these intervals and the free surface data of each
rules and by the flag Administration / IRS for all tank;
statutory aspects. The manuals are to be readily
available. They are to include information - For self-elevating units, information
applicable to the particular drilling unit, so as to regarding the preparation of the unit to avoid
provide suitable guidance to the operating structural damage during the setting or
personnel with regard to safe operation of the retraction of legs on or from the seabed or
unit for both normal and envisaged emergency during extreme weather conditions while in
conditions. The manuals are to, in addition to transit, including the positioning and
providing the necessary general information securing of legs, cantilever drill floor
about the unit, contain guidance on and structures and drilling equipment or
procedures for the operations that are vital to materials which might shift position;
the safety of personnel and the unit. The
manuals are to be concise and be compiled in - Capacity plan showing capacities and the
such a manner that they are easily understood. vertical, longitudinal and transverse centres
Each manual is to be provided with a contents of gravity of tanks and bulk material
list, an index and wherever possible be cross- stowage spaces, free surface corrections,
referenced to additional detailed information etc.
which is to be readily available on board.
- Instructions for operation, including
The operating manual for normal operations is precautions to be taken in adverse weather,
to include all the information specified in chapter changing mode of operations, any inherent
14 of the MODU Code (IMO Resolution limitations of operations for each mode of
A1023(26)) or as specified by the operation and for each change in mode of
Administration. operation, etc.
For the purpose of classification requirements - Plans and description of the ballast system
given in these rules, the operating manual and instructions for ballasting.
should contain at least the information
mentioned in 4.6.2 to 4.6.4. - Identification and classification of hazardous
areas on the unit.
4.6.2 The operating manual for normal
operations is to include the following general - Light ship data based on the results of an
descriptive information: inclining experiment together with a
comprehensive listing of the inclusions and
- General description and particulars of the exclusions of semi-permanent equipment,
unit etc.
- Pertinent data for each approved mode of - Acceptable structural deck loadings
operation, including design and variable
loading, air gap, wave height, wave period, - Stability information in the form of maximum
wind, current, sea and air temperatures KG-draught curve, or other suitable
assumed seabed conditions and any other parameter based upon compliance with the
applicable environmental conditions such as required intact and damaged stability
icing assumed seabed conditions, draft, etc. criteria.
- Minimum anticipated atmospheric and sea - Description and limitations of any on-board
temperatures. computer used in operations such as
ballasting, anchoring, dynamic positioning
- General arrangement showing watertight and in trim and stability calculations
and weathertight boundaries, watertight and
weathertight closures, vents, allowable deck

Page 17 of 19
___________________________________________________________________________________
- Description of towing arrangements and .1 description of fire-extinguishing systems and

limiting conditions of operation equipment;
- Description of the main power system and .2 description of means of escape;

limiting conditions of operation
.3 description of the emergency power system
- Identification of the helicopters used for the and limiting conditions of operation;
design of the helideck and any limiting
conditions of operation. .4 a list of key plans and schematics which may
be useful during emergency situations;
- A list of key plans and schematics
.5 general procedures for deballasting or
4.6.3 The operating manual for normal counterflooding and the closure of all openings
operations is to also include, where applicable: which may lead to progressive flooding in the
event of damage;
.1 guidance for the maintenance of adequate
stability and the use of the stability data; .6 guidance for the person in charge in
determining the cause of unexpected list and
.2 guidance for the routine recording of trim and assessing the potential effects of
lightweight alterations; corrective measures on unit survivability, i.e.
strength, stability, buoyancy, etc.;
.3 examples of loading conditions for each mode
of operation and instructions for developing .7 special procedures in the event of an
other acceptable loading conditions, including uncontrolled escape of hydrocarbons or
the vertical components of the forces in the hydrogen sulphide, including emergency
anchor cables; shutdown; and
.4 for column-stabilized units, a description, .8 guidance on the restoration of mechanical,

schematic diagram and guidance for the electrical and ventilation systems after main
operation of the ballast system and of the power failure or emergency shutdown.
alternative means of ballast system operation,
together with a description of its limitations, such 4.6.5 The information provided in the operating
as pumping capacities at various angles of heel manuals is to be supported, where necessary,
and trim; by additional material provided in the form of
plans, manufacturers’ manuals and other data
.5 a description, schematic diagram, guidance necessary for the efficient operation and
for the operation of the bilge system and of the maintenance of the unit. Detailed information
alternative means of bilge system operation, provided in manufacturers’ manuals need not be
together with a description of its limitations, such repeated in the operating manuals. The
as draining of spaces not directly connected to information is to be referenced in the operating
the bilge system; manual, readily identified, located in an easily
accessible place on the unit and be available at
.6 fuel oil storage and transfer procedures; all times.
.7 procedures for changing modes of operation; 4.7 Construction booklet
.8 guidance on severe weather operations and 4.7.1 A set of plans showing the exact location
time required to meet severe storm conditions, and extent of application of different grades and
including provisions regarding lowering or strengths of structural materials, together with a
stowage of equipment, and any inherent description of the material and welding
operational limitations; procedures employed, is to be placed aboard
the unit. Any other relevant construction
.9 description of the anchoring arrangements information is to be included in the booklet,
and anchoring or mooring procedures and any including restrictions or prohibitions regarding
limiting factors; repairs or modifications.
.10 description of the dynamic positioning 4.8 Records

systems and limiting conditions of operation;
4.8.1 The following information or records are to
4.6.4 The operating manual for emergency be maintained on board:
operations is to include, where applicable:

Chapter 1 General
Page 18 of 19
.1 survey record under Ch.2; .4 testing records and equipment changes for
anchors and related equipment as per Ch.10;
.2 inspection and maintenance records related
to means of access; .5 maintenance, inspection and testing records
relating to fire-fighting equipment as per Ch.14.
.3 light ship data alterations log as per Ch.5;
Section 5
Classification of Drilling Units not Built under the Survey of

5.1 General procedure for classification of

drilling units not built under survey of IRS 5.2 Plans and data to be furnished as
required in 5.1.1
5.1.1 Plans of hull and machinery in duplicate,
together with torsional vibration calculations, 5.2.1 Plans of hull and equipment showing the
where applicable, are to be submitted for main scantlings and arrangements of the actual
approval. It is preferable to have the plans drilling unit and any proposed alterations are to
approved before the classification survey is be submitted for approval. These are to normally
commenced. comprise of the following plans:
5.1.2 Full special classification surveys would - General arrangement

require to be carried out by IRS Surveyors in
order to satisfy themselves regarding the - Inboard and outboard profile
workmanship and to verify the approved
scantlings and arrangements. The scope of - Summary of distributions of fixed and
these surveys may, however, be modified in the Variable weights
case of vessels built under the Special Survey
and holding valid certificates of class of - Plan indicating design loading for all decks
established classification societies, if prior to
commencement of survey by IRS, documentary - Transverse sections showing scantlings
evidence of all hull and machinery classification
surveys held by the other society subsequent to - Decks, including helicopter deck
last special survey carried out by them could be
produced. In such cases, a special survey - Framing
notation will not be assigned in conjunction with
the classification survey. The next special - Shell plating
survey therefore would become due five years
from the special survey held by the other society - Watertight bulkheads and flats
and not five years from classification with IRS.
- Structural bulkheads and flats
In cases of transfer of class from another society
to single class of IRS, the interim certificate of - Tank boundaries with location of overflows
class or any other documents enabling the
drilling unit to trade, can be issued only after all - Pillars and girders
overdue surveys and recommendations or
conditions of class issued by the previous - Diagonals and Struts
society are satisfactorily completed.
- Legs
5.1.3 For drilling units not built under survey of
IRS but subsequently taken in class with the - Structure in way of jacking or other elevating
above procedure, the mark signifying the survey arrangements
during construction will be omitted.
- Stability columns and intermediate columns
5.1.4 Once a drilling unit has been taken into
IRS class, periodical surveys are subsequently - Hulls, pontoons, footings, pads or mats
to be held as per these rules.

Page 19 of 19
___________________________________________________________________________________
- Superstructures and deck houses
- Propulsion machinery, including shafts and
- Arrangement and details of watertight doors propellers
and hatches
- Steering gear and rudders
- Anchor handling arrangements
- Auxiliary machinery
- Welding details and procedures
- Pumping and piping systems, including
- Lines or offsets valves
- Curves of form or equivalent data - Boilers and Pressure Vessels
- Cross curves of stability or equivalent data - Electrical installations
- Wind heeling moment curves or equivalent - Protection against fire and explosion.
data
5.2.2 Calculations of torsional vibration
- Capacity plan characteristics of the main propelling machinery
are to be furnished specially for drilling units
- Tank sounding tables which have been in service for less than about 2
years.
- Operating Manuals as per 4.6
5.2.3 In addition to the requirements of 5.2.1,
- Corrosion control arrangements additional plans would require to be submitted in
accordance with applicable Chapters of Part 5,
- Methods and locations for non-destructive of Rules & Regulations for the Construction &
testing Classification of Steel Ships for drilling units with
additional class notations.
- Jacking system
End Of Chapter

Page 1 of 11
___________________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 2
Periodical Surveys
Contents
Section
1 General Requirements
2 Annual Surveys
3 Docking Surveys
4 Special Surveys - Hull
5 Special Surveys - Machinery
6 Surveys of Screw Shafts, Tube Shafts and Propellers
7 Boiler Surveys
Section 1
General Requirements
1.1 General history on board and identifiable critical

and/or suspect areas.
1.1.1 All drilling units are to be subjected to
Periodical Surveys for the purpose of d) Suspect Areas are locations considered by
maintenance of class. Survey notations and the Surveyor to be prone to rapid wastage.
Survey intervals are given in Table 1.1.1 for
main class Surveys. Where additional class e) Critical areas are locations which have been
notations have been assigned, Surveys are to identified from calculations to require
be carried out at intervals given in Table 1.1.2. monitoring or from the service history of the
subject unit or sister units (if available) to be
1.1.2 Vessels with additional class notations for sensitive to cracking, buckling or corrosion
which there are no specific Survey requirements which would impair the structural integrity of
defined in this Chapter are to have the the unit.
equipment and/or construction related to this
additional class notation examined to the f) Anniversary date means the day and month
Surveyor's satisfaction at each Special Survey. of each year corresponding to the expiry
However, at the time of Annual Surveys the date of the classification certificate
continued effectiveness, of operational features,
safety devices and control systems are to be 1.2 Survey pre-planning and record keeping
verified.
1.2.1 Plans and procedures for Special Surveys,
1.1.3 Definitions: Special Continuous Surveys, and Drydocking
Surveys are to be submitted for review in
a) Ballast Tank is a tank which is used advance of the survey and made available on
primarily for salt water ballast. board. These should include drawings or forms
for identifying the areas to be surveyed, the
b) Spaces are separated compartments. extent of hull cleaning, non-destructive testing
locations (including NDT methods),
c) Representative Spaces are those which are nomenclature, and for the recording of any
expected to reflect the condition of other damage or deterioration found. Submitted data,
spaces of similar type and service and with after review by the Surveyor(s), will be subject to
similar corrosion protection systems; when revision if found to be necessary in light of
selecting representative spaces account experience.
should be taken of the service and repair

Page 2 of 11
Table 1.1.1 : Periodical survey intervals for main class notations
(Any specific requirements of the flag Administration are also to be complied with)
Survey Main class survey notation Survey interval in years
Hull : Special Survey SSH 5
Hull : Continuous Survey CSH 5
Machinery : Special Survey SSM 5
Machinery : Continuous Survey CSM 5
1
Annual Survey AS 1
2
Docking Survey DS 2.5
Tailshaft Survey
3
with approved oil gland TS(OG) 5
3
with continuous liner TS(CL) 5
3
with shaft of corrosion resistant material TS(NC) 5
with condition monitoring TS(TCM) See Note 5
3
other than above TS 2.5
4
Main boilers MBS 2.5
4
Auxiliary boilers ABS 2.5
4
Exhaust gas steam generators and economisers EGES 2.5
Steam pipe Survey SPS
1st Survey 10
2nd and subsequent Surveys 5
Notes:
1. Survey may be carried out within 3 months on either side of the due date.
2. At least 2 Surveys are to be carried out within any 5 years but the interval between two consecutive surveys is not to exceed
3 years, and one of these two docking surveys should coincide with the Special Survey. Proposals for alternative means for
providing underwater inspections equivalent to drydocking survey would be considered by IRS as detailed in Section 3.
3. Upon request, IRS may extend the survey period to harmonise with docking Survey.
4. At least 2 Surveys are to be carried out within any 5 years but the interval between two consecutive surveys is not to exceed
3 years.
5. Condition monitoring records are to be verified at the time of annual surveys and during docking survey. No specific time
interval is required between complete tailshaft surveys.
Table 1.1.2 : Periodical survey intervals for additional class notations
Survey of Additional class notation Survey interval in years

Diving system JUS
Annual Survey AS(JUS) 11
Special Survey SS(JUS) 5
Note:
1 May be carried out within 3 months on either side of due date

Page 3 of 11
___________________________________________________________________________________
1.3 Reactivation surveys
1.7.3 Tanks and spaces are to be safe for
1.3.1 In the case of units which have been out of access, i.e. gas freed, ventilated, etc. Tanks and
service for an extended period, the requirements spaces are to be reasonably clean and free from
for reactivation surveys will be specially water, scale, dirt, oil residues, etc. to reveal
considered in each case with due regard given significant corrosion, deformation, fractures,
to the status of surveys at the time of the damages and other structural deterioration.
commencement of the lay-up period, the length
of the period, and conditions under which the 1.7.4 Adequate illumination is to be provided to
unit had been maintained during that period. reveal significant corrosion, deformation,
fractures, damages or other structural
1.4 Surveys for damage deterioration.
1.4.1 It is the responsibility of the owner/ 1.7.5 Means are to be provided to enable the
operator of the unit to report to IRS without Surveyor to examine the structure in a safe and
delay any damage, defect or breakdown, which practical way.
could invalidate the conditions for which a
classification has been assigned so that it may 1.7.6 Thickness measurement is normally to be
be examined at the earliest opportunity by IRS carried out by means of ultrasonic test
Surveyor(s). All repairs found necessary by the equipment. The accuracy of the equipment is to
Surveyor are to be carried out to his satisfaction. be proven to the Surveyor as required.
1.5 Alterations 1.7.7 One or more of the following fracture

detection procedures may be required if deemed
1.5.1 No alterations which may affect classifi- necessary by the Surveyor:
cation are to be made to the hull or machinery of
a classed unit unless plans of proposed - radiographic equipment
alterations are submitted and approved by IRS
before the work of alterations is commenced. - ultrasonic equipment
such work is to be carried out in accordance - magnetic particle equipment

with approved plans and tested on completion
as required by the Rules and to the satisfaction - dye penetrant.
of the Surveyor(s).
1.8 Welding and replacement of materials
1.6 Unscheduled surveys
1.8.1 Welding of steels, including high strength
1.6.1 In the event that IRS has reason to believe structural steel, is to be to the satisfaction of the
that its Rules and Regulations are not being Surveyor(s).
complied with, IRS reserves the right to perform
unscheduled surveys of the hull or machinery. 1.8.2 Welding of other fabrication performed on
steels of special characteristics or repairs or
1.7 Provision for hull surveys renewals of such steel or in areas adjacent to
such steel is to be accomplished with
1.7.1 The Surveyors are to be provided with procedures approved by the Surveyors
necessary facilities for a safe execution of considering the special materials involved.
survey. Substitution of steels differing from those
originally installed is not to be made without
1.7.2 The surveys at sea or at anchorages may approval by IRS.
be carried out provided necessary precautions
are taken while carrying out the survey and
adequate assistance is provided.

Page 4 of 11
Section 2
Annual Surveys
2.1 General together with their respective securing

devices, dogs, sill, coamings and supports;
2.1.1 Annual Class Surveys are to be made
within three months either way of each annual g) Freeing ports together with bars, shutters
anniversary date of the crediting of the previous and hinges;
Special Survey of Hull, or of the original
construction date. These should be held h) Windlass and attachment of anchor racks
concurrently with statutory annual or other and anchor cables;
relevant statutory surveys, where practicable.
i) Protection of the crew, guard rails, lifelines,
2.1.2 The survey is to consist of an examination gangways, and deck houses
for the purpose of ensuring, as far as accommodating crew;
practicable, that the hull structure, equipment
and machinery are maintained in a satisfactory j) General examination of the machinery
condition. installation including boilers, steering gear,
control systems, etc.
2.1.3 The Surveyors are to be satisfied at each
Annual Survey that no material alterations have k) A general examination of the automatic and
been made to the unit, its structural remote-control system is to be made to the
arrangements, subdivision, superstructure, Surveyor's satisfaction. The machinery-
fittings, and closing appliances upon which the space fire-detecting and bilge water-level
stability calculations or the load line assignment alarms are to be checked for performance.
is based.
l) A general examination of electrical
2.2 Survey requirements - All types of drilling machinery, the emergency sources of
units electrical power, the switchgear and other
electrical equipment, including their
2.2.1 At each Annual Survey the exposed parts operation. The operation of the emergency
of the hull, deck, deck house, structures sources of power, including their automatic
attached to the deck, derrick substructure, operation is to be confirmed as far as
including supporting structure, accessible practicable.
internal spaces and the parts listed below, as
applicable, are to be generally examined and m) A general examination of hazardous areas,
placed in satisfactory condition as found remote shutdown arrangements, fire fighting
necessary and : systems, piping systems and bilge systems.
a) Accessible hatchways, manholes and other 2.3 Survey requirements - Surface-type units
openings;
2.3.1 In addition to the requirements of 2.2, the
b) Machinery casings and covers, companion- following are to be examined :
ways, and deck houses protecting openings;
- The hull and deck structure around the
c) Portlights together with deadcovers, cargo drilling well (moon-pool) and in vicinity of
ports and similar openings in hull sides, any other structural changes-in-section,
ends, or in enclosed superstructures; slots, steps, or openings in the deck or hull
and the back-up structure in way of
d) Ventilators, tank vent pipes together with structural members or sponsors connecting
flame screens, and overboard discharges to the hull.
from enclosed spaces;
2.4 Survey requirements- Self-elevating units
e) Watertight bulkheads and end bulkheads of
enclosed superstructures; 2.4.1 In addition to the requirements of 2.2, the
following are to be examined :
f) Closing appliances for all the above,
including hatchcovers, doors check valves, - Jack-house structures and attachments to
upper hull or platform;

Page 5 of 11
___________________________________________________________________________________
- Columns, diagonal and horizontal braces
- Jacking or other elevating systems and leg together with any other parts of the upper
guides, externally. hull supporting structure as accessible
above the waterline.
- Legs as accessible above the waterline,
plating and supporting structure in way of Note : At the first annual survey after
leg wells. construction, Column Stabilized and Self
Elevating Units may be subject to examination
2.5 Survey requirements - Column-stabilized of major structural components including non-
units destructive testing, as deemed necessary by
IRS. If IRS deems such survey to be necessary,
2.5.1 In addition to the requirements of 2.2, the the extent should be agreed to by the Surveyors
following are to be examined : and the owner or operator prior to
commencement of the Survey.
Section 3
Docking Surveys
3.1 General 3.2.2 For Self-Elevating Units
3.1.1 An examination of the underwater parts of - External surfaces of the upper hull or
each drilling unit is to be made at intervals within platform, spud cans, mat underwater areas
six months either side of the due date (normally of legs, together with their connections as
every thirty months) provided that at least two applicable, are to be selectively cleaned to
docking surveys are carried out within any five the satisfaction of the attending Surveyor
years and one of these drydock survey (or and examined.
underwater inspection in lieu of drydock surveys
in accordance with 3.3) coincides with Special - At each Drydocking Survey (or equivalent),
Survey. Proposals for alternative means of after Special Survey No.2, the surveyor is to
providing underwater inspection in lieu of be satisfied with the condition of the internal
Drydocking Survey will be considered provided structure of the mat or spud cans.
they are in general agreement with the intent of
3.3. Consideration will be given to special - Leg connections to mat and spud cans are
circumstances justifying an extension of the to be examined at each Drydock Survey.
intervals. Non-destructive testing may be required of
areas considered to be critical by the
3.2 Parts to be examined Surveyor or found to be suspect by the
Surveyor.
3.2.1 For Surface-type Units (ship or barge type
units) 3.2.3 For Column-Stabilized Units
- External surfaces of the hull, keel, stem, - External surfaces of the upper hull or
stern frame, rudder, nozzles and sea platform, footings, pontoons or lower hulls,
strainers are to be selectively cleaned to the underwater areas of columns, bracing and
satisfaction of the attending Surveyor and their connections, and propulsion units as
examined together with appendages, the applicable, are to be selectively cleansed
propeller, exposed parts of stern bearing and examined to the satisfaction of the
assembly, rudder pintle and guide on attending Surveyor. Non-destructive testing
securing arrangements, sea chest and may be required of areas considered to be
strainers, and their fastenings. critical by the Surveyor or found to be
suspect by the Surveyor.
- Propeller shaft bearing, rudder bearing and
steering nozzle clearances are to be 3.2.4 In conjunction with Drydocking Surveys (or
ascertained and reported upon. equivalent) after Special Survey No.1 and
between subsequent Special Surveys, the
following ballast spaces are to be internally
examined, thickness gauged and placed in
satisfactory condition, as found necessary, and

Page 6 of 11
reported upon. If such examination reveals no date records of the base depths are to be
visible structural defects, the examination may maintained on board. Whenever the
be limited to verification that the corrosion stainless-steel seal sleeve is renewed or
control arrangements remain effective. machined, the base readings for the wear-
down gauge are to be re-established and
a) For Surface-type Units noted in the vessel's records and in the
survey report.
One peak tank and at least two other
representative ballast tanks between the b) Rudder bearing
peak bulkheads used primarily for water
ballast. - For self-propelled units with rudders, means
and access are to be provided for
b) For Self-Elevating Units determining the condition and clearance of
the rudder bearings, and for verifying that all
Representative ballast tanks or free-flooding parts of the pintle and gudgeon assemblies
compartments in mat or spud cans, if are intact and secure. This may require
accessible and least two representative hull bolted access plates and a measuring
pre-load tanks. arrangement.
c) For Column-Stabilized Units c) Sea suction
Representative ballast tanks in footings, lower - Means are to be provided to enable the
hulls, or free-flooding compartments as diver to confirm that the sea suction
accessible, and at least two ballast tanks in openings are clear. Hinged sea suction
columns or upper hull, if applicable. grids would facilitate this operation.
3.2.5 Non-metallic expansion joints in piping d) Sea valves

systems, if located in a system which penetrates
the unit’s side and both the penetration and the - For the Drydocking Survey (Underwater
non-metallic expansion joint are located below Inspection) associated with the Special
the deepest load waterline, are to be inspected Survey, means must be provided to
and replaced as necessary, or at an interval examine any sea valve.
recommended by the manufacturer.
3.3.3 Conditions
3.3 Underwater-inspection in lieu of dry-
docking survey a) Limitation
3.3.1 Where physical features as given in 3.3.2 - Underwater Inspection in lieu of Drydocking
are incorporated in units' design a properly Survey may not be acceptable where there
conducted underwater inspection may be is record of abnormal deterioration or
credited as equivalent to a Drydocking Survey, damage to the underwater structure; or
subject to compliance with the conditions and where damage affecting the fitness of the
procedures given below in 3.3.3 and 3.3.4 unit is found during the course of the survey.
respectively.
b) Thickness Gauging and Non-Destructive
3.3.2 Physical features Testing
The following physical features are to be - Underwater or internal thickness gaugings

incorporated into the unit's design in order to of suspect areas may be required in
facilitate the underwater inspection. When conjunction with the underwater inspection.
verified they will be noted in the unit's Means for underwater non-destructive
classification for reference at subsequent testing may also be required for fracture
surveys. detection.
a) Stern bearing c) Plans and data
- For self-propelled units, means are to be - Plans and procedures for the Drydocking
provided for ascertaining that the seal Survey (Underwater Inspection) are to be
assembly on oil-lubricated bearings is intact submitted for review in advance of the
and for verifying that the clearance or wear- survey and made available on board. These
down of the stern bearing is not excessive. should include drawings or forms for
For use of the wear-down gauges, up-to- identifying the areas to be surveyed, the

Page 7 of 11
___________________________________________________________________________________
extent of underwater cleaning, non- with two-way communication capable of
destructive testing locations (including NDT being monitored by the Surveyor(s) as
methods), nomenclature, and for the required, or photographic documentation, or
recording of any damage or deterioration both, depending on the age and type of unit.
found. The approved plans and procedures This is to be supplemented by the Diver's
are to be made available on board for the Report describing and attesting to the
purpose of preplanning of the survey. conditions found. A copy of this diver's
report and pertinent photographs are to be
d) Underwater conditions submitted to the attending Surveyor for
forwarding to IRS, together with his report.
- The areas to be surveyed are to be Copies are also to be retained onboard,
sufficiently clean and the sea water clear together with any video tapes, reference.
enough to permit meaningful examination
and photography (if necessary) by diver. c) Damage area
Overall or spot cleaning may be required.
- Damage areas are to be photographed.
3.3.4 Procedures Internal examination, measurements,
marking and thickness gauging of such
a) Exposed areas locations may be necessary as determined
by the attending Surveyor. Means are to be
- An examination of the outside of the provided for location, orienting and
structure above the waterline is to be carried identifying underwater surfaces in
out by the Surveyor(s). Means and access photographs or on video tapes.
are to be provided to enable the Surveyor to
accomplish visual inspection and non- 3.3.5 Alternatives
destructive testing as necessary.
Alternatives to the above guidelines including
b) Underwater areas remotely operated vehicles may be accepted,
provided the means and details for
- An examination of the entire unit below the accomplishing results are no less effective.
waterline is to be carried out by a suitably
qualified diver using closed-circuit television
Section 4
Special Surveys - Hull
4.1 General 4.1.3 For surveys completed within 3 months

before the expiry date of the Special Survey, the
4.1.1 For mobile offshore drilling units, the first next period of class will start from the expiry
Special Survey becomes due five years after the date of the Special Survey. For surveys
date of build. Subsequent Special Surveys completed more than 3 months before the expiry
become due five years after the crediting date of date of the Special Survey, the period of class
the previous Special Survey. However, an will start from the survey completion date.
extension of class of 3 months maximum
beyond the 5th year can be granted in 4.1.4 The Special Survey may be commenced
exceptional circumstances. In this case the next at the 4th Annual Survey and be progressed
period of class will start from the expiry date of with a view to completion by the 5th anniversary
the Special Survey before the extension was date. When the special survey is commenced
granted. When considered necessary by IRS, prior to the fourth annual survey, the entire
the interval between Special Surveys may be survey is to be completed within 15 months if
reduced. Special survey requirements for units such work is to be credited to the special survey
of unusual design, in lay-up or in unusual and in this case the next period of class will start
circumstances will be determined on an from the survey completion date.
individual basis.
4.1.5 The special survey is to ensure that the
4.1.2 The interval between the Special Surveys hull, structure, equipment and machinery are in
may be reduced at the request of the parties satisfactory condition and that the unit is fit for
concerned or by IRS if considered appropriate. its intended purpose for the new period of class
of 5 years to be assigned subject to proper

Page 8 of 11
maintenance and operation and surveys carried compartments filled with foam or corrosion
out at the due dates. inhibitors, and tanks used only for lube oil,
light fuel oil, diesel oil, or other non-
4.2 Special continuous surveys corrosion products may be waived
provided that upon a general examination
4.2.1 At the request of the Owner, a system of the Surveyor considers their condition to
Continuous Survey may be accepted whereby be satisfactory. External thickness gauging
the Special Survey requirements are carried out may be required to confirm corrosion
in regular rotation in accordance with the Rules control.
to complete all the requirements of the particular
Special Survey within a five year period. Any iii) Attachments of anchor racks and
defects that may affect classification found anchor cable fairleads. Anchors, cables
during the survey, are to be reported upon and and their respective handling means are to
dealt with to the satisfaction of the Surveyor. be examined.
4.3 Special Survey No.1 iv) Structures such as derrick

substructure and supporting structure,
4.3.1 Special Survey No.1 of Hull is to include jack-houses, deck houses,
verification of compliance with the foregoing superstructures, helicopter landing areas
Annual Survey and Drydocking Survey (or and their respective attachments to the
equivalent) requirements. In addition, the deck or hull.
following requirements as listed below are to be
carried out as applicable, the parts examined, v) Foundations and supporting headers,
placed in satisfactory condition, and reported brackets, and stiffeners for drilling related
upon. apparatus, where attached to hull, deck,
superstructure or deck house.
a) General - All Drilling Units
vi) Survey of parts of the unit which are
i) The hull or platform structure including underwater and inaccessible to the
tanks, watertight bulkheads and deck, Surveyor may be accepted on the basis of
cofferdams, void spaces, sponsons, chain an examination by a qualified diver carried
lockers, duct keels, helicopter deck and its out in the presence of the Surveyor.
supporting structure, machinery spaces, Alternative means, approved by IRS, may
peak spaces, steering gear spaces, and all be considered. Video or photo records,
other internal spaces are to be examined non-destructive testing and thickness
externally and internally for damage, gauging may be required in addition to the
fractures, or excessive wastage. diver's report.
Thickness gauging of plating and framing
may be required where wastage is evident vii) At each Special Periodical Survey,
or suspected. thickness gaugings are to be carried out
where wastage is evident or suspect.
ii) All tanks, compartments and free-
flooding spaces throughout the drilling unit viii) The foundation of machinery are to be
are to be examined externally and examined.
internally for excess wastage or damage.
Sea chests, strainers and any underwater b) Surface-type Units
propulsion units and pipes are to be
selectively cleaned and examined. Internal i) Structural appendages and ducts for
examinations of spud cans and mats is to positioning units.
be specially considered. Watertight
integrity of tanks, bulkheads, hull, decks c) Self-elevating units
and other compartments is to be verified
by visual inspection. Suspect areas may  All legs, including chords, diagonal and
be required to be tested for rightness, non- horizontal braces, gussets, racks, joints,
destructive tested or thickness gauged. together with leg guides are to be
Tanks and other normally-closed examined. Tubular or similar type legs
compartments are to be ventilated, gas are to be examined externally and
greed and cleaned as necessary to internally, together with internal
expose damages and allow meaningful stiffeners and pinholes as applicable.
examination and thickness gauged in case
of excessive wastage. Internal  Structure in, around and under jack-
examination and testing of void spaces, house and leg walls. Non-destructive
Page 9 of 11
___________________________________________________________________________________
testing of suspect areas may be d) Column-stabilized units
required.
Connections of columns and diagonals to upper
 Leg jacking or other elevating systems hull, structure or platform and lower hull,
externally. structure or pontoons. Joints of supporting
structure including diagonals, braces and
 Leg connections to bottom mats or spud horizontals, together with gussets and brackets.
cans, including non-destructive testing Internal continuation or back-up structure for the
of leg connections to mats or spud cans. above. Non-destructive examination may be
required of suspect areas.
 Jetting piping systems or other external
piping, particularly where penetrating 4.4 Special Survey No.2 and subsequent
mats or spud cans. special surveys
 Spud cans or mats. Where the spud 4.4.1 These surveys are to be at least as
cans or mat are partly or entirely comprehensive as special survey No.1, with
obscured below the mud line where the special attention being given to the condition
Special Survey is otherwise being and thickness of material in high corrosion
completed, consideration will be given areas. Representative gaugings will be required.
to postponement of the examinations These will be specified in advance by IRS.
until the next Rig move. Special attention will be paid to splash zones on
hulls, legs or related structure, and in ballast
tanks, pre-loaded tanks, free-flooding spaces,
spud cans and mats.
Section 5
Special Surveys - Machinery
5.1 General Electric lighting, electrical fixtures, and

instrumentation are to be examined, proven
5.1.1 Main and auxiliary machinery of all types satisfactory and verified as explosion-proof
of drilling units are to be subjected to Special or intrinsically safe. Ventilating systems
Surveys at intervals similar to those for Special including ductwork, fans, intake and exhaust
Surveys - Hull, in order that both are completed locations for enclosed restricted areas are to
at approximately the same time. be examined, tested and proven
satisfactory. Ventilating-air alarm systems to
5.1.2 The requirements for Special Surveys - be proven satisfactory. Electrical motors are
Machinery/Continuous Survey - Machinery given to be examined including closed-loop
in Part 1 of Rules and Regulations for the ventilating systems for large d-c motors.
Construction & Classification of Steel Ships are Automatic power disconnect to motors in
to be complied with. case of loss of ventilating air to be proved
satisfactory.
5.1.3 In addition, mobile offshore drilling Units
may have many items of machinery and b) Remote Shutdown Arrangements
electrical equipment not found on conventional
vessels. Certain of these items are required for - Remote shutdown for fuel-oil transfer
classification even if the unit is without service pumps and ventilating equipment,
propulsion machinery. These items to be together with oil tank outlet valves where
especially examined and reported upon at all required to be able of being remotely closed
Special Surveys as follows: are to be provided satisfactory. Emergency
switch(s) for all electrical equipment
a) Hazardous Areas including main and emergency generators,
except alarm and communication systems
- Enclosed hazardous areas such as those and lighting in vital areas such as escape
containing open active mud tanks, shale routes and landing platforms, are to be
shakers, degassers and desanders are to proved satisfactory.
be examined and doors and closures in
boundary bulkheads verified as effective.

Page 10 of 11
c) Fire Fighting Apparatus operationally of hydrostatically tested to

working pressure, to the satisfaction of the
- A general examination of the fire detection Surveyor.
and extinguishing apparatus is to be made
in order that the Surveyor may be satisfied f) Miscellaneous
with its efficient state. The following items
are to be especially examined:  Heat exchangers and other unfired
pressure vessels within the scope of
 Fire hoses, nozzles and spanners at classification are to be examined, opened
each fire station. out or thickness gauged and pressure
tested as considered necessary, and
 Servicing of all portable soda-acid and associated relief valves proved operable.
foam extinguishers. Evaporators that operate with a vacuum on
the shell need not be opened, but may be
 Weighing and re-charging as necessary accepted on basis of satisfactory external
of all dry chemical and CO2 examination and operational test or review
extinguishers. of operating records.
 Fire pumps and piping including  Propulsion-assist and dynamic

operation and capacity. positioning equipment is to be surveyed
 Alarm systems.  All mechanical, hydraulic and pneumatic

control actuators and their power systems
d) Self Elevating Systems for control systems are to be examined and
tested as considered necessary.
 On self elevating type drilling units, the
elevating systems are to be examined and  Control systems for unattended
reported on, Pinions and gears of the machinery spaces are to be subjected to
climbing pinion gear train of rack and pinion dock trials at reduced power on the
systems are to b e examined, as far as propulsion engine to ensure the proper
practicable, to the Surveyor's satisfaction by performance of all automatic functions,
an effective crack detection method. alarms, and safety systems.
e) Piping Systems  Bilge alarm systems, if fitted to be tested

and proven satisfactory.
 Piping systems used solely for drilling
operations and complying either with the
requirements or a recognized standard are
to be examined, as far as practical,
Section 6
Surveys of Screw Shafts, Tube Shafts and Propellers
6.1 General including weardown check as far as is

possible.
6.1.1 The requirements for surveys given in Part
1 of Rules and Regulations for the Construction b) Internal examination of the shaft area
& Classification of Steel Ships are to be (inboard seals) in propulsion room(s).
complied with.
c) Confirmation of satisfactory lubricating oil
6.1.2 Due to low running hours on tailshafts in records (oil loss rate, contamination).
case of drilling units, extended intervals between
tailshaft surveys may be considered based on: d) Shaft seal elements are examined/replaced
in accordance with seal manufacturer's
a) Satisfactory diver's external examination of recommendations.
stern bearing and outboard seal area

Page 11 of 11
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 7
Boiler Surveys
7.1 General
7.1.1 The requirements for surveys given in Part

1 of Rules and Regulations for the Construction
& Classification of Steel Ships are to be
complied with.
End Of Chapter

Page 1 of 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 3
Materials
Contents
Section
1 Manufacture, Survey and Certification
2 Materials for Construction
Section 1
Manufacture, Survey and Certification
1.1 General specifications equivalent to above may also be

accepted.
1.1.1 Materials, used for the construction or
repair of the hull and machinery of drilling units 1.1.3 Consideration is to be given to the
which are classed or intended to be classed with minimization of hazardous substances used in
IRS, are to be manufactured, tested and the construction of the unit and is to facilitate
inspected in accordance with the requirements recycling and removal of hazardous materials.
of Part 2 of the Rules and Regulations for the
Construction and Classification of Steel Ships. 1.1.4 Materials which contain asbestos are not
permitted.
1.1.2 Materials complying with recognized
national or international standards with
Section 2
Materials for Construction
2.1 Hull steel grades of operation. If data giving the lowest daily
average temperature is not available and some
2.1.1 For surface type units the materials for hull other criterion is used (such as lowest monthly
construction are to be in accordance with the average temperature), then such data will be
requirements of Pt.3, of Rules and Regulations specially considered by IRS.
for the Construction and Classification of Steel
Ships depending on the air temperature in area 2.1.4 Influencing Factors
of operation, thickness of material and the stress
pattern associated with its location. A particular application in association with a
defined minimum service temperature depends
2.1.2 For self-elevating and column stabilized on toughness parameters, taking the following
units the material for hull construction are to be influencing factors into account:
selected considering the defined minimum
service temperature, influencing factors and  Stress Relieving : A lower service
application as given in 2.1.3 to 2.1.5 below. temperature than stipulated in the Table
2.1.4 for the relevant steel grade may be
2.1.3 Minimum service temperature of considered when a stress relieving heat
material treatment is employed.
The minimum service temperature of the steel is  Cold Forming : When cold forming subjects
to be assumed equal to the lowest of the the extreme fiber to greater than about 3 per
average daily atmospheric temperatures, based cent strain consideration is to be given to
on meteorological data, for any anticipated area applying a suitable heat treatment.

Chapter 3 Materials
Page 2 of 4
 Primary : Structural elements essential to

 Steel Manufacturing Process : When a the overall integrity of the unit.
steel manufacturing process, such as
normalizing, controlled or TM rolling, or  Special : Those portions of primary
grain refinement, is utilized when not structural elements which are in way of
specifically required by Part 2 of Rules and critical load transfer points, stress
Regulations for the Construction & concentrations, etc.
Classification of Steel Ships, a lower service
temperature may be used subject to  Some specific examples of structural
agreement of IRS. elements which would fall into the
aforementioned categories are given in
2.1.5 Application Table 2.1.5:
For the purpose of these rules, structural 2.2 Material selection for machinery
members have been grouped into three
application categories of increasing importance 2.2.1 Materials to be used for construction of
as follows: machinery are to be selected in accordance with
Pt.4, of Rules and Regulations for the
 Secondary : Structural elements of minor Construction and Classification of steel Ships.
importance, failure of which is unlikely to
affect the overall integrity of the unit.
Table 2.1.4 : Thickness limitations [mm] of hull structural steel according to various application
categories and design temperatures
Minimum Design Temperature

Category
Grade 0C -10C -20C -30C -40C -50C
A 30 20 10 X X X
B 40 30 20 10 X X
D 50 50 45 35 25 15
E 50 50 50 50 45 35
AH 40 30 20 10 X X
DH 50 50 45 35 25 15
Secondary
EH 50 50 50 50 45 35
FH 50 50 50 50 50 50
AQ 40 25 10 X X X
DQ 50 45 35 25 15 X
EQ 50 50 50 45 35 25
FQ 50 50 50 50 50 45
A 20 10 X X X X
B 25 20 10 X X X
D 45 40 30 20 10 X
E 50 50 50 40 30 20
AH 25 20 10 X X X
DH 45 40 30 20 10 X
Primary
EH 50 50 50 40 30 20
FH 50 50 50 50 50 40
AQ 20 X X X X X
DQ 45 35 25 15 X X
EQ 50 50 45 35 25 15
FQ 50 50 50 50 45 35

Page 3 of 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 2.1.4 : Thickness limitations (mm) of hull structural steel according to various application
categories and design temperatures (Contd.)
Minimum Design Temperature
Category
Grade 0C -10C -20C -30C -40C -50C
A X X X X X X
B 15 X X X X X
D 30 20 10 X X X
E 50 45 35 25 15 X
AH 15 X X X X X
DH 30 20 10 X X X
Special
EH 50 45 35 25 15 X
FH 50 50 50 50 40 30
AQ X X X X X X
DQ 25 15 X X X X
EQ 50 40 30 20 10 X
FQ 50 50 50 40 30 20
"X" indicates no application
Notes:
1. Thicknesses greater than shown in the Table will be specially considered by IRS.
2. Substitutions of materials considered to be equivalent to the Grades shown, or steels of different

strength levels, will be specially considered by IRS.
3. Interpolation of thicknesses for intermediate temperatures may be considered.

Chapter 3 Materials
Page 4 of 4
Table 2.1.5 : Examples of structural elements falling in different application categories
Types of mobile offshore drilling units

Category Column stabilised units Self elevating units
a) Internal structure including bulkheads i) Internal framing, including bulkheads
and girders in vertical columns, decks, and girders, in cylindrical legs
lower hulls and diagonal and
horizontal bracing and framing
members
b) Upper platform decks, or decks of ii) Internal bulkheads and framing
upper hulls except areas where the members of upper hull structure
structure is considered primary or
Secondary
special application
c) Certain large diameter vertical iii) Internal bulkheads of bottom mat
columns with low length to diameter supporting structure except where the
ratios, except at inter-sections structure is considered primary or special
application
iv) deck, side and bottom plating of upper
hull except where the structure is
considered primary application
a) External shell structure of vertical i) External plating of cylindrical legs
columns, lower and upper hulls and
diagonal and horizontal braces
b) Deck plating, heavy flanges and ii) Plating of all components of lattice type
bulkhead within the upper hull or legs
platform which form "Box" or "I" type
supporting structure which do not
receive major concentrated loads
c) Bulkheads, flats or decks and framing iii) Combination of bulkhead, deck, side
which provide local re-inforcement or and bottom plating within the upper hull
continuity of structure in way of which form "Box" or "I" type main
Primary
intersections except areas where the supporting structure
structure is considered special
application
iv) Jack-house supporting structure and
bottom footing structure which receives
initial transfer of load from legs
v) Internal bulkheads, shell and deck of
bottom mat supporting structure which are
designed to distribute major loads, either
uniform or concentrated, into the mat
structure
a) External shell structure in way of i) Vertical columns in way of intersection
intersections or vertical columns, with the mat structure
decks and lower hulls
b) Portions of deck plating, heavy flanges ii) Intersections of lattics type leg structure
and bulkheads within the upper hull or which incorporate novel construction,
platform which from "Box" or "I" type including the use of steel castings
supporting structure when receive
Special major concentrated loads
c) Major intersections of bracing
members
d) External brackets, portions of
bulkheads, flats and frames which are
designed to receive concentrated
loads at intersections of major
structural members
End Of Chapter
Page 1 of 6
___________________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 4
Design Loads
Contents
Section
1 General
2 Wind Loads
3 Wave Loads
4 Current Loads
5 Vortex Shedding
6 Deck Loads
7 Other Loadings
Section 1
General
1.1 General be approved. Where possible, the design

environmental criteria determining the loads on
1.1.1 Various modes of operation of a drilling the unit and its individual elements is to be
unit are to be investigated using realistic loading based upon significant statistical information and
conditions, including gravity loadings together are to have a return period (period of
with relevant environmental loadings due to the recurrence) of at least 50 years for the most
effects of wind, waves, currents, ice and, where severe anticipated environment. If a unit is
deemed necessary by the owner/designer, the restricted to seasonal operations in order to
effects of earthquake, sea bed supporting avoid extremes of wind and wave, such
capabilities, temperature, fouling, etc. Where seasonal limitations are to be specified.
applicable, the design loadings indicated herein
are to be adhered to for all types of mobile 1.1.3 Limiting design data for each mode of
offshore drilling units. operation is to be stated in the operating
manual.
1.1.2 The owner/designer will specify the
environmental conditions for which the unit is to
Section 2
Wind Loads
2.1 Wind velocities 2.1.2 The design wind velocity for units intended
for unrestricted offshore service is not to be less
2.1.1 Sustained and gust velocities, as relevant, than 36 [m/sec] (70 knots) for all normal
are to be considered when determining wind operating conditions and not less than 51.5
loadings. These may be specified by the [m/sec] (100 knots) for the severe storm
owner/designer but the wind velocities condition.
measured at a reference height of 10 m above
sea level are not to be taken less than those For units intended for restricted service lesser
given in 2.1.2. wind velocities as specified by the
owner/designer may be considered, but they are
not to be less than 25.8 [m/sec] (50 knots).

Page 2 of 6
2.2 Wind pressures and forces b) Areas exposed due to heel, such as
underdecks, etc., are to be included using
2.2.1 Pressures and resultant forces are to be the appropriate shape coefficients.
calculated as per 2.2.2 below. Where wind
tunnel data obtained from tests on a c) The block projected area of a clustering of
representative model of the unit by a recognized deckhouses may be used in lieu of
laboratory are submitted, these data will be calculating each individual area. In this
considered for the determination of pressures case, the shape coefficient may be taken as
and resulting forces. 1.1.
2.2.2 The wind pressure P, is to be obtained Table 2.2.2(b) : Values of Ch

from the following formula:
Height* in metres
P = 6.11 Ch Cs V2 x 10-4 [kN/m2] Not Ch
Over
Exceeding
where,
0 15.3 1.0
Cs = the shape coefficient, see Table 2.2.2(a) 15.3 30.5 1.10
30.5 46.0 1.20
Ch = the height coefficient, see Table 2.2.2(b)
46.0 61.0 1.30
V = the wind velocity [m/s] 61.0 76.0 1.37
76.0 91.5 1.43
Table 2.2.2(a) : Values of Cs 91.5 106.5 1.48
106.5 122.0 1.52
Shape Cs 122.0 137.0 1.56
Spherical 0.4 137.0 152.5 1.60
Cylindrical 0.5 152.5 167.5 1.63
Hull (surface type), 1.0 167.5 183.0 1.67
Deck house 1.0 183.0 198.0 1.70
Large flat surface 1.0 198.0 213.5 1.72
Drilling derrick (each 1.25 213.5 228.5 1.75
face),
Exposed underdeck 1.3 228.5 244.0 1.77
beams and girders 244.0 259.0 1.79
Isolated structural 1.5 Above 259 1.80
shapes
* The height of the centre of the wind exposed
Note: Shapes or combinations of shapes which area from sea level
do not readily fall into the specified categories
will be subject to special consideration by IRS.
d) Isolated houses, structural shapes, cranes,
etc., are to be calculated individually, using
2.2.3 Wind force the appropriate shape coefficient.
F = PA [kN] e) Open truss work commonly used for derrick
towers, booms and certain types of masts
A = the projected area of all exposed surfaces in
may be approximated by taking 30% of the
either the upright or the heeled condition [m2] projected block area of each side, e.g. 60%
of the projected block area of one side for
In calculating the wind forces, the following
double-sided truss work. An appropriate
procedures are recommended: shape coefficient is to be taken from the
table.
a) In the case of units with columns, the
projected areas of all columns are to be
included; i.e. no shielding allowance is to be
taken.

Page 3 of 6
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 3
Wave Loads
3.1 Wave criteria expressed as the sum of the force vectors

indicated in the following equation:
3.1.1 Design wave criteria specified by the
owner/designer may be described either by Fw = FD + FI
means of design wave energy spectra or by
deterministic design waves having appropriate Fw = hydrodynamic force vector per unit length
shape, size and period. Consideration is to be along the member, acting normal to the axis of
given to waves of less than maximum height the member
where, due to their period, the effects on various
structural elements may be greater. FD = drag force vector per unit length, see 3.3.2
3.2 Determination of wave loads FI = inertia force vector per unit length, see
3.2.3.
3.2.1 The determination of wave loads for use in
structural design is to be based on acceptable 3.3.2 The drag force vector per unit length, FD,
calculations, model tests or full scale for a stationary, rigid member is given by
measurements. For structures comprised of
slender members which do not significantly alter FD = (C/2) D CD un | un| [kN/m]
the incident wave field, semi-empirical
formulations such as Morison's equation (see C = 1.025
3.3.1) may be used. For calculations of wave
loads on structural configurations which D = projected width [m] of the member in the
significantly alter the incident wave field, direction of the cross-flow component of velocity
diffraction methods are to be used which (in the case of a circular cylinder, D denotes the
account for both the incident wave force (i.e. diameter)
Froude-Krylov force) and the forces resulting
from wave diffraction and radiation. CD = drag coefficient (dimensionless), see 3.3.6
3.2.2 The wave forces utilized in the design un = component of the velocity vector, normal to
analysis are to include the effects of immersion, the axis of the member [m/s], see 3.3.6
heeling and accelerations due to motion.
| un | = absolute value of un [m/s];
3.2.3 In general, Morison's equation may be
used for structures comprised of slender 3.3.3 The inertia force vector per unit length, FI,
members having diameters (or equivalent for a stationary, rigid member is given by
diameters giving the same cross- sectional
2
areas parallel to the flow) less than 20% of the FI = C ( D / 4) CM an [kN/m]
wave lengths being considered and are small in
relation to the distances between structural CM = inertia coefficient based on the displaced
members subject to wave loading (e.g. self- mass of fluid per unit length (dimensionless),
elevating units in the elevated condition and see 3.3.6
most column-stabilized units).
an = component of the fluid acceleration vector
3.2.4 For each combination of wave height, normal to the axis of the member [m/s2], see
wave period and water depth being considered, 3.3.6.
a range of wave crest positions relative to the
structure is to be investigated to ensure an 3.3.4 For structures which exhibit substantial
accurate determination of the maximum wave rigid body oscillations due to wave action, the
force on the structure. modified form of Morison's equation given below
may be used to determine the hydrodynamic
3.3 Hydrodynamic forces force per unit length.
3.3.1 Morison's Equation : The hydrodynamic Fw = FD + FI

force acting normal to the axis of a cylindrical
member, as given by Morison's equation, is = (C/2) D CD (un - u'n) | un - u'n |

Page 4 of 6
+ C ( D2/4) [an + Cm (an - a'n)] 3.3.6 Values of un and an for use in Morison's
equation are to be determined using wave
u'n = component of the velocity vector of the theories appropriate to the wave heights, wave
structural member normal to its axis, [m/s] periods and water depths being considered.
Drag and inertia coefficients vary considerably
Cm = added mass coefficient i.e. Cm = CM - 1 with section shape, Reynold's number,
Keulegan-Carpenter number and surface
a'n = component of the acceleration vector of the roughness. They are to be based on reliable
2
structural member normal to its axis, [m/s ]. data obtained from literature, model or full scale
tests. For circular cylindrical members at
3.3.5 For structural shapes other than circular Reynold's numbers greater than 1 x 106, CD and
cylinders, the term ( D2/4) in 3.3.3 and 3.3.4 CM may be taken at 0.62 and 1.8 respectively
above is to be replaced by the actual cross- provided that marine fouling is prevented or
sectional area of the shape. periodically removed.
Section 4
Current Loads
4.1 Current associated with waves 4.2.1 and added vectorially to the calculated
wave force.
4.1.1 When determining loads due to the
simultaneous occurrence of waves and current 4.1.2 The current velocity is to include
using Morison's equation, the current velocity is components due to tidal current, storm surge
to be added vectorially to the wave particle current and wind driven current. In lieu of
velocity before the total force is computed. defensible alternative methods, the vertical
When diffraction methods are used for distribution of current velocity in still water and
calculating wave force the drag force due to its modification in the presence of waves as
current should be calculated in accordance with shown in Fig. 4.1.2 are recommended,

Page 5 of 6
___________________________________________________________________________________
where , such that the current velocity at the

instantaneous free surface is a constant.
Vc = Vt + Vs + Vw [(h - z)/h], for z  h
4.2 Drag force
Vc = Vt + V s for z > h
4.2.1 When calculating the drag force on
and submerged parts of the structure
due to current alone, the following equation may
Vc = current velocity [m/s] be used:
Vt = component of tidal current velocity in the fD = C/2 D CD uc | uc |

direction of the wind [m/s]
fD = current drag force vector per unit length
Vs = component of storm surge current [m/s] along the member, acting normal to the axis of
the member [kN/m]
Vw = wind driven current velocity [m/s]
uc = component of the current velocity vector,
h = reference depth for wind driven current [m] Vc, normal to the axis of the member
(in the absence of other data h may be taken as
5 [m] C, D, CD = as defined in 3.3.2
z = distance below still water level under Drag coefficients in steady flow vary
consideration [m] considerably with section shape, Reynold's
number and surface roughness and are to be
d = still water depth [m]. based on reliable data obtained from literature,
model or full scale tests.
In the presence of waves, the current velocity
profile is to be modified, as shown in Fig.4.1.2, 4.2.2 Consideration is to be given to the
possibility of wave induced vibration.
Section 5
Vortex Shedding
5.1 Loadings due to vortex shedding
5.1.1 Consideration is to be given to the

possible dynamic effects induced in structural
members due to vortex shedding.
Section 6
Deck Loads
6.1 General Space Min. design loading

Crew spaces 4.5 [kN/m2]
6.1.1 A loading plan is to be prepared for each (walkways, general
design. This plan is to show the maximum traffic areas, etc.),
design uniformly distributed and concentrated
Work areas 9 [kN/m2]
loading for all areas for each mode of operation.
The values of design loadings are not to be less Storage areas 13 [kN/m2]
than: Helicopter platform 2 [kN/m2]

Page 6 of 6
Section 7
Other Loadings
7.1 Other relevant loadings are to be determined and riser tensioners, seismic loads, ice loads
in a manner to the satisfaction of IRS. (For etc.).
example, operational loads due to drilling derrick
End Of Chapter

Page 1 of 10
___________________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 5
Stability, Watertight/Weathertight Integrity and Loadline
Contents
Section
1 Stability
2 Watertight / Weathertight Integrity
3 Loadline
Section 1
Stability
1.1 General the test, which is to be witnessed by a Surveyor

of IRS.
1.1.1 Stability afloat
1.1.3.2 For successive units which are identical
All units are to have positive stability in calm by design, the light ship data of the first unit of
water equilibrium position, for the full range of the series may be accepted by IRS in lieu of an
draughts when in all modes of operation afloat, inclining test, provided the difference in light ship
and for temporary positions when raising or displacement or position of center of gravity due
lowering. In addition, all units are to meet the to weight changes for minor differences in
stability requirements set forth in this section, for machinery, outfitting or equipment, confirmed by
all applicable conditions. the results of a lightweight survey, is less than
1% of the values of the light ship displacement
For the purpose of calculations it is to be or principal horizontal dimensions respectively
assumed that the unit is floating free of mooring as determined for the first of the series.
restraints. However, the possible detrimental
effects of mooring restraints are to be Extra care to be given to the detailed weight
considered. calculation and comparison with the original unit
of a series of column-stabilized, semi-
1.1.2 Units resting on the sea bed submersible types as these, even though
identical by design, are recognized as being
Units designed to rest on the sea bed are to unlikely to attain an acceptable similarity of
have sufficient positive downward gravity weight or center of gravity to warrant a waiver of
loadings on the support footings or mat to the inclining test.
withstand the overturning moment of the
combined environmental forces from any 1.1.3.3 The results of the inclining test, or
direction, with a reserve against the loss of lightweight survey and inclining experiment
positive bearing of any footing or segment of the adjusted for weight difference, are to be
area thereof, for each design loading condition. reviewed by IRS prior to inclusion in the
Variable loads are to be considered in a realistic operating Manual.
manner, to the satisfaction of IRS.
1.1.3.4 A record of all changes to machinery,
1.1.3 Inclining test structure, outfitting and equipment that affect the
light ship data, is to be maintained in the
1.1.3.1 An inclining test is to be conducted for operating manual or in a light ship data
the first unit of a design, when the unit is as near alteration log and is to be taken into account in
to completion as possible, to determine the daily operations.
accurately the light ship data (weight and
position of center of gravity). An inclining test
procedure is to be submitted for review prior to

Chapter 5 Stability, Watertight/Weathertight Integrity and Loadline
Page 2 of 10
1.1.3.5 For column-stabilized units: 1.1.4.3 The curves of wind heeling moments are
to be drawn for wind forces calculated by the
a) A lightweight survey or inclining test is following formula:
to be conducted at the first renewal
survey. If a lightweight survey is
conducted and it indicates a change F  0.5C s C H ρV 2 A
from the calculated light ship
displacement in excess of 1% of the
where,
operating displacement, an inclining test
is to be conducted, or the difference in
F = the wind force [N]
weight is to be placed in an indisputably
conservative vertical center of gravity
Cs = shape coefficient depending on the shape
and approved by IRS.
of the structural member exposed to the wind as
per Table 2.2.2(a) of Ch.4, Sec.2.
b) If the survey or test at the first renewal
survey demonstrated that the unit was
Ch = height coefficient depending on the height
maintaining an effective weight control
above sea level of the structural member
programme and at succeeding renewal
exposed to wind as per Table 2.2.2(b) of Ch.4,
surveys this is confirmed by the records
Sec.2.
under paragraph 1.1.3.4 light ship
displacement may be verified in
 = mass density of air [1.222 kg/m3]
operation by comparison of the
calculated and observed draught.
V = wind velocity [m/s]
Where the difference between the
expected displacement and the actual 2
A = projected area [m ] of all exposed surfaces
displacement based upon draught
in either the upright or the heeled condition
readings exceed 1% of the operating
displacement, a lightweight survey is to
1.1.4.4 Wind forces are to be considered from
be completed in accordance with
any direction relative to the unit and the value of
paragraph 1.1.3.5a).
the wind velocity is to be as follows:
1.1.3.6 The inclining test or lightweight survey is
a) In general a minimum wind velocity of 36
to be carried out in the presence of Surveyor of
[m/s] (70 knots) for offshore services are to be
IRS,
used for normal operating conditions and a
minimum wind velocity of 51.5 [m/s] (100 knots)
1.1.4 Righting moment and heeling moment
is to be used for the severe storm conditions.
curves
b) Where a unit is to be limited in operation to
1.1.4.1 Curves of righting moments and of wind
sheltered locations (protected inland waters
heeling moments similar to Fig. 1.1.4.1 with
such as lakes, bays, swamps, rivers, etc.)
supporting calculations are to be prepared
consideration is to be given to a reduced wind
covering the full range of operating draughts,
velocity of not less than 25.8 [m/s] (50 knots) for
including those in transit conditions, taking into
normal operating conditions.
account the maximum loading of materials in the
most unfavourable position applicable. The
1.1.4.5 In calculating the projected areas to the
righting moment curves and wind heeling
vertical plane, the area of surfaces exposed to
moment curves are to be related to the most
wind due to heel or trim, such as under-deck
critical axes. Account is to be taken of the free
surfaces, etc., are to be included using the
surface of liquids in tanks.
appropriate shape factor. Open truss work may
be approximated by taking 30% of the projected
1.1.4.2 Where equipment is of such a nature
block area of both the front and back section,
that it can be lowered and stowed, additional
i.e. 60% of the projected area of one side.
wind heeling moment curves may be necessary
and such data are to clearly indicate the position
1.1.4.6 In calculating the wind heeling moments,
of such equipment. Provisions regarding the
the lever of the wind overturning forces are to be
lowering and effective stowage of such
taken vertically from the center of pressure of all
equipment are to be included in the operating
surfaces exposed to the wind to the center of
manual.
lateral resistance of the underwater body of the
unit. The unit is to be assumed floating free of
mooring restraint.

Page 3 of 10
___________________________________________________________________________________
1.1.4.7 The wind heeling moment curve is to be 1.1.4.8 Wind heeling moments derived from
calculated for a sufficient number of heel angles wind tunnel tests on a representative model of
to define the curve. For ship shaped hulls the the unit may be considered as alternative to the
curve may be assumed to vary as the cosine method given in 1.1.4.3 to 1.1.4.7. Such heeling
function of vessel heel. moment determination is to include lift and drag
effects at various applicable heel angles.
Fig. 1.1.4.1 : Righting moment and heeling moment curves
1.2 Intact stability criteria approximate length of time required, considering

both operating conditions and transit conditions,
1.2.1 The stability of a unit in each mode of are to be contained in the operating manual. It
operation is to meet the following criteria (Also should be possible to achieve the severe storm
see Fig.1.1.4.1): condition without the removal or relocation of
solid consumables or other variable load.
1.2.1.1 For self-elevating and surface type units, However, IRS may permit loading a unit past the
the area under the righting moment curve to the point at which solid consumables would have to
second intercept or downflooding angle, be removed or relocated to go to severe storm
whichever is less, is not to be less than 40% in condition under the following conditions,
excess of the area under the wind heeling provided the allowable KG is not exceeded:
moment curve to the same limiting angle.
1.2.2.1 in a geographic location where weather
i.e. Area (A+B)  1.4 x Area (B+C) conditions annually or seasonally do not
become sufficiently severe to require a unit to go
1.2.1.2 For column stabilized units, the area to severe storm condition; or
under the righting moment curve to the angle of
downflooding is not to be less than 30% in 1.2.2.2 Where a unit is required to support extra
excess of the area under the wind heeling deck load for a short period of time that falls well
moment curve to the same limiting angle. within a period for which the weather forecast is
favourable.
i.e. Area (A+B)  1.3 x Area (B+C)
The geographic locations, weather conditions
1.2.1.3 In all cases, the righting moment curve is and loading conditions in which this is permitted
to be positive over the entire range of angles is to be identified in the operating manual.
from upright to the second intercept.
1.2.3 Alternative stability criteria may be
1.2.2 Each unit is to be capable of attaining a considered by IRS, provided an equivalent level
severe storm condition in a period of time of safety is maintained and if it is demonstrated
consistent with the meteorological conditions. to afford adequate positive initial stability. In
The procedures recommended and the determining the acceptability of such criteria, at

Page 4 of 10
least the following is to be taken into account, as

appropriate: 1.2.3.5 an adequate safety margin to account for
uncertainties.
1.2.3.1 environmental conditions representing
realistic winds (including gusts) and waves 1.3 Damage stability
appropriate for world-wide service in various
modes of operation. 1.3.1 The unit is to have sufficient freeboard and
be subdivided by means of watertight decks and
1.2.3.2 dynamic response of a unit. Analysis is bulkheads to provide sufficient buoyancy and
to include the results of wind tunnel tests, wave stability to withstand:
tank model tests, and non-linear simulation,
where appropriate. Any wind and wave spectra 1.3.1.1 In general, the flooding of any single
used are to cover sufficient frequency ranges to compartment or any combination of
ensure that critical motion responses are compartments in any operating or transit
obtained. condition consistent with the damage
assumptions set out in 1.4;
1.2.3.3 potential for flooding taking into account
dynamic responses in a seaway; 1.3.1.2 For a self-elevating unit, the flooding of
any single compartment while meeting the
1.2.3.4 susceptibility to capsizing considering following criterion (See Fig.1.3.1.2):
the unit’s restoration energy and the static
inclination due to the mean wind speed and the
maximum dynamic response;
Fig.1.3.1.2 : Residual stability for self-elevating units
Fig.1.3.3.3 Residual damage stability requirements for column stabilized units

Page 5 of 10
___________________________________________________________________________________
 
RoS  θ m  θ s  Max 7 o  1.5 θ s , 10 o 
1.3.4.1 the angle of inclination after flooding is
where, not to be greater than 25;
RoS = range of stability, [degree] 1.3.4.2 any opening below the final waterline is
to be made watertight;
m = maximum angle of positive stability,
[degree] 1.3.4.3 a range of positive stability of at least 7
is to be provided, beyond the calculated angle of
inclination in these conditions.
s = static angle of inclination after damage,
[degree]
1.3.5 All types of units – Compliance with the
provisions of 1.3.1 to 1.3.4 are to be determined
The range of stability is determined without
by calculations which take into consideration the
reference to the angle of down flooding.
proportions and design characteristics of the unit
and the arrangements and configuration of the
1.3.2 The unit should have sufficient reserve
damaged compartments. In making these
stability in a damaged condition to withstand the
calculations, it is assumed that the unit is in the
wind heeling moment based on a wind velocity
worst anticipated service condition as regards
of 25.8 [m/s] (50 knots) superimposed from any
stability and is floating free of mooring restraints.
direction. In this condition the final waterline,
after flooding, are to be below the lower edge of
1.3.6 The ability to reduce angles of inclination
any down flooding opening.
by pumping out or ballasting compartments or
application of mooring forces, etc., are not to be
1.3.3 Column-stabilized units – The unit
considered as justifying any relaxation of these
should have sufficient freeboard and be
provisions.
subdivided by means of watertight decks and
bulkheads to provide sufficient buoyancy and
1.3.7 Alternative subdivision and damage
stability to withstand a wind heeling moment
stability criteria may be considered for approval
induced by a wind velocity of 25.8 [m/s] (50
by IRS provided an equivalent level of safety is
knots) superimposed from any direction in any
maintained. In determining the acceptability of
operating or transit condition, taking the
such criteria, at least the following and take into
following considerations into account:
account:
1.3.3.1 the angle of inclination after the damage
1.3.7.1 extent of damage as set out in section
set out in 1.4.10.2 is not to be greater than 17;
1.4;
1.3.3.2 any opening below the final waterline is
1.3.7.2 on column-stabilized units, the flooding
to be made watertight and openings within 4 [m]
of any one compartment as set out in paragraph
above the final waterline is to be made
1.3.4;
weathertight;
1.3.7.3 the provision of an adequate margin
1.3.3.3 the righting moment curve, after the
against capsizing.
damage set out above, to have, from the first
intercept to the lesser of the extent of
1.4 Extent of damage
weathertight integrity under 1.3.3.2 and the
second intercept or down flooding angle, a
1.4.1 Surface units - In assessing the damage
range of at least 7. Within this range, the stability of surface units, the following extent of
righting moment curve is to reach a value of at damage is to be assumed to occur between
least twice the wind heeling moment curve, both effective watertight bulkheads:
being measured at the same angle. (See
Fig.1.3.3.3). 1.4.1.1 horizontal penetration: 1.5 m; and
1.3.4 The unit is to provide sufficient buoyancy 1.4.1.2 vertical extent: from the base line
and stability in any operating or transit condition upwards without limit.
with the assumption of no wind to withstand the
flooding of any watertight compartment wholly or 1.4.2 The distance between effective watertight
partially below the waterline in question, which is bulkheads or their nearest stepped portions
a pump-room, a room containing machinery with which are positioned within the assumed extent
a salt water cooling system or a compartment of horizontal penetration are not to be less than
adjacent to the sea, taking the following 3 m; where there is a lesser distance, one or
considerations into account:

Page 6 of 10
more of the adjacent bulkheads are to be

disregarded. 1.4.10 Column-stabilized units - In assessing
the damage stability of column-stabilized units,
1.4.3 Where damage of a lesser extent than in the following extent of damage is to be
1.4.1 results in a more severe condition, such assumed:
lesser extent is to be assumed.
1.4.10.1 Only those columns, underwater hulls
1.4.4 All piping, ventilation systems, trunks, etc., and braces on the periphery of the unit is to be
within the extent of damage referred to in 1.4.1 assumed to be damaged and the damage is to
is to be assumed to be damaged. Positive be assumed in the exposed portions of the
means of closure are to be provided at columns, underwater hulls and braces.
watertight boundaries to preclude the
progressive flooding of other spaces which are 1.4.10.2 Columns and braces are to be
intended to be intact. assumed to be flooded by damage having a
vertical extent of 3 m occurring at any level
1.4.5 Self-elevating units - In assessing the between 5 m above and 3 m below the draughts
damage stability of self-elevating units, the specified in the operating manual. Where a
following extent of damage is to be assumed to watertight flat is located within this region, the
occur between effective watertight bulkheads: damage is to be assumed to have occurred in
both compartments above and below the
1.4.5.1 horizontal penetration: 1.5 m; and watertight flat in question. Lesser distances
above or below the draughts may be applied to
1.4.5.2 vertical extent: from the base line the satisfaction of IRS, taking into account the
upwards without limit. actual operating conditions. However, the
required damage region is to extend at least 1.5
1.4.6 The distance between effective watertight m above and below the draught specified in the
bulkheads or their nearest stepped portions operating manual.
which are positioned within the assumed extent
of horizontal penetration are not to be less than 1.4.10.3 No vertical bulkhead is to be assumed
3 m; where there is a lesser distance, one or to be damaged, except where bulkheads are
more of the adjacent bulkheads are to be spaced closer than a distance of one eighth of
disregarded. the column perimeter at the draught under
consideration, measured at the periphery, in
1.4.7 Where damage of a lesser extent than in which case one or more of the bulkheads are to
1.4.5 results in a more severe condition, such be disregarded.
lesser extent is to be assumed.
1.4.10.4 Horizontal penetration of damage is to
1.4.8 Where a mat is fitted, the above extent of be assumed to be 1.5 m.
damage is to be applied to both the platform and
the mat simultaneously, only when the highest 1.4.10.5 Underwater hull or footings are to be
draught allows any part of the mat to fall within assumed to be damaged when operating in a
1.5 [m] (5 ft) vertically of the waterline and the transit condition in the same manner as
difference in horizontal dimension of the upper indicated in paragraphs 1.4.10.1, 1.4.10.2,
hull and the mat is less than 1.5 [m] (5 ft) in any 1.4.10.4 and either paragraph 1.4.10.3 or 1.4.6,
area under consideration. having regard to their shape.
1.4.9 All piping, ventilation systems, trunks, etc., 1.4.10.6 All piping, ventilation systems, trunks,
within the extent of damage referred to in 1.4.5 etc., within the extent of damage is to be
is to be assumed to be damaged. Positive assumed to be damaged. Positive means of
means of closure are to be provided at closure are to be provided at watertight
watertight boundaries to preclude the boundaries to preclude the progressive flooding
progressive flooding of other spaces which are of other spaces which are intended to be intact.
intended to be intact.

Page 7 of 10
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 2
Watertight/Weathertight Integrity
2.1 Watertight boundaries indicators on the weather deck, or in a normally

manned space. For self-elevating drilling units,
2.1.1 All drilling units are to be provided with ventilating systems which are not used during
watertight bulkheads necessary to meet the the transit operations may be secured by
damage stability criteria and their scantlings are alternative methods, subject to special
to be in accordance with the requirements given consideration by IRS.
in Chapter 6. In the case of column stabilized
drilling units, the scantlings of the watertight flats 2.3 Closures
and bulkheads are to be made effective to that
point necessary to meet the requirements of
damage stability and are to be indicated on the 2.3.1 General
appropriate plans. In all cases, the plans
submitted are to clearly indicate the location and External closing appliances are to be as
extent of the bulkheads. prescribed by applicable load line requirements.
Special consideration will be given to openings
2.1.2 All surface type drilling units are to be in the upper deck of column stabilized units.
fitted with a collision bulkhead as may be
required by the Rules and Regulations for the 2.3.2 General requirements related to watertight
Construction & Classification of Steel Ships. integrity
Sluice valves, cocks, manholes, watertight
doors, etc; are not to be fitted in the collision a) External openings such as air pipes
bulkhead. Elsewhere, watertight bulkheads are (regardless of closing appliances),
to be fitted as necessary to provide transverse ventilators, ventilation intakes and outlets,
strength and subdivision. non-watertight hatches and weathertight
doors, which are used during operation
2.2 Boundary penetrations while afloat
2.2.1 Where watertight boundaries are required These are not to submerge when the drilling unit
for damage stability, they are to be made is inclined to the first intercept of the righting
watertight throughout, including piping, moment and wind heeling moment curves in any
ventilation, shafting, electrical penetrations, etc. intact or damaged condition. See Fig. 1.2.2 and
Where individual lines, ducts or piping systems 1.3.3(a) respectively.
serve more than one compartment or are within
the extent of damage, satisfactory arrange- Openings, such as side scuttles of the non-
ments are to be provided to preclude the opening type, manholes and small hatches
possibility of progressive flooding through the which are fitted with appliances to ensure
system to other spaces in the event of damage, watertight integrity, may be submerged, except
to ensure compliance with the requirements of in case of the column of column stabilized
damage stability given in 1.3. drilling units.
2.2.2 Piping systems and ventilation ducts Such openings are not to be regarded as
designed to watertight standards of the type emergency exits. Where flooding of chain
mentioned in 2.2.1 are to be provided with lockers or other buoyant volumes may occur,
valves in each compartment served. These the openings to these spaces should be
valves are to be capable of being remotely considered as downflooding points.
operated from the weather deck, pump room or
other normally manned space. Valve position b) Internal openings fitted with appliances to
indicators are to be provided at the remote ensure watertight integrity
control stations.
These are to comply with the following:
2.2.3 Non-watertight ventilation ducts as
mentioned in 2.2.1 are to be provided with i) Doors or hatch covers which are used
watertight valves at the subdivision boundaries during the operation of the unit while
and the valves are to be capable of being afloat is to be remotely controlled from
operated from a remote location, with position the central ballast control station and is

Page 8 of 10
to also be operable locally from each

side. Open/shut indicators are to be iii) Manholes fitted with bolted covers need
provided at the control station. In not be dealt with as under (i).
addition, remotely operated doors
provided to ensure the watertight iv) The closing appliances are to have
integrity of internal openings which are strength, packing and means for
used while at sea are to be sliding securing which are sufficient to maintain
watertight doors with audible alarm. The watertightness under the design water
power, control and indicators are to be pressure of the watertight boundary
operable in the event of main power under consideration.
failure. Particular attention is to be paid
to minimizing the effect of control 2.3.3 General requirements related to
system failure. Each power-operated weathertight integrity
sliding watertight door is to be provided
with an individual hand operated a) Any opening, such as an air pipe, ventilator,
mechanism. It is to be possible to open ventilation intake or outlet, non-watertight
and close the door by hand at the door sidescuttle, small hatch, door, etc., having its
itself from both sides. lower edge submerged below a waterline
associated with the zones indicate in (i) or (ii)
ii) Doors or hatch covers in self-elevating below, is to be fitted with a weathertight closing
units, or doors placed above the appliance to ensure the weathertight integrity,
deepest loadline draft in column when:
stabilized and surface units, which are
normally closed while the unit is afloat i) a unit is inclined to the range between the first
may be of the quick acting type and are intercept of the righting moment curve and the
to be provided with an alarm system wind heeling moment curve and the angle
(e.g. light signals) showing personnel necessary to comply with the requirements of
both locally and at the central ballast 1.3 during the intact condition of the unit while
control station whether the doors or afloat; and
hatch covers in question are open or
closed. A notice is to be affixed to each ii) a column stabilized unit is inclined to the
such door or hatch cover stating that it range:
is not to be left open while the unit is
afloat. - necessary to comply with the requirements
of 1.3.3.3 and with a zone measured 4.0 [m]
iii) The closing appliances are to have perpendicularly above the final damaged
strength, packing and means for waterline per 1.3.3.1 referred to Fig.2.3.3
securing which are sufficient to maintain and
watertightness under the design water
pressure of the watertight boundary - necessary to comply with the requirements
under consideration. of 1.3.4.3.
c) Internal and external openings kept b) External openings fitted with appliances to
permanently closed while afloat ensure weathertight integrity, which are kept
permanently closed while afloat, are to comply
These are to comply with the following: with the requirements of 2.3.2c).
i) A signboard stating that the opening is c) External openings fitted with appliances to
always to be kept closed while afloat is ensue weathertight integrity, which are secured
to be fitted on the closing appliance in while afloat are to comply with the requirements
question. of 2.3.3b).
ii) Opening and closing of such closure

devices are to be noted in the drilling
unit's logbook, or equivalent.

Page 9 of 10
___________________________________________________________________________________
S ee 1 .3 .3 .1
Fig.2.3.3 : Minimum weathertight integrity requirements for column stabilized units
Section 3
Load Line
3.1 General structure, to the satisfaction of IRS. These

marks, where practicable, are to be visible to the
3.1.1 The requirements of the International person in charge of mooring, lowering or
Convention on Load Lines, 1966(ILLC,1966), otherwise operating the unit.
including those relating to certification, apply to
all drilling units. The minimum freeboard of units 3.1.3 All down flooding openings which may
which due to their configuration cannot be become submerged before the angle of
computed by the normal methods laid down by inclination at which the required area under the
the Load Line Convention is to be determined intact righting arm curve is achieved are to be
on the basis of meeting applicable intact fitted with weathertight closing appliances.
stability, damage stability and structural
requirements for transit and drilling operating 3.1.4 A load line, where assigned, is not
conditions while afloat. In no case is the draught applicable to bottom-supported units when
to exceed that permitted by the International resting on the sea bed, or when lowering to or
Convention on Load Lines, where applicable. raising from such position.
3.1.2 The requirements of ILLC, 1966, in respect 3.2 Self elevating and surface type drilling
of weather tightness and watertightness of units
decks, superstructures, deckhouses, doors,
hatchway covers, other openings, ventilators, air 3.2.1 Where it is necessary to assign a greater
pipes, scuppers, discharges, etc; are to be taken than minimum freeboard to meet intact or
as a basis for all drilling units in afloat condition. damage stability requirements or on any other
restriction imposed by the Administration,
Sill heights of hatch coamings, ventilator regulation 6(6) of ILLC, 1966, is to be applied. In
coamings, air pipes, doors, etc; in exposed such cases, seasonal marks above the centre of
positions and their means of closing are also to the ring should not be marked and any seasonal
based on both the intact stability and damage marks below the centre of ring should be
stability requirements given in 1.2 and 1.3 marked. However, when a unit is assigned a
respectively. greater than minimum freeboard at the request
of the owner, regulation 6(6) need not be
Load line markings including such seasonal applied.
allowances as may be determined, are to be
placed at suitable visible locations on the 3.2.2 Moonpools, open wells and recesses etc.-

Page 10 of 10
normal methods laid down by the 1988 LL

a) Where moonpools are arranged within the Protocol is to be determined on the basis of
hull in open communication with the sea, the meeting applicable provisions regarding intact
volume of the moonpool is not to be stability, damage stability and structure in the
included in the calculation of any hydrostatic afloat condition.
properties. If the moonpool has a larger
cross-sectional area above the waterline at 3.2.5 Self-elevating units with large mat/similar
85% of the depth for freeboard (depth for supporting structures
freeboard has the same meaning as defined
in Regulation 3 of the 1988 LL Protocol than In case of a self-elevating unit utilising a large
below, an addition is to be made to the mat or similar supporting structures for
geometric freeboard corresponding to the contribution to buoyancy in afloat conditions, the
lost buoyancy. This addition for the excess mat or similar supporting structure is to be
portion above the 85% of the depth for ignored while calculating the freeboard.
freeboard waterline is to be made as However, as their vertical position relative to the
prescribed below for wells or recesses. If an upper hull may be critical, they are to be taken
enclosed superstructure contains part of the into account in the evaluation of the stability of
moonpool, deduction is to be made for the the unit while afloat.
effective length of the superstructure.
3.2.6 In case of a self-elevating unit which may
Where open wells or recesses are arranged be manned when under tow, any required
in the freeboard deck, a correction equal to exemption or relaxation of the applicable bow
the volume of the well or recess to the height requirement, is to be authorised by the
freeboard deck divided by the waterplane Administration.
area at 85% of the depth for freeboard is to
be added to the freeboard obtained after all 3.3 Column stabilized units
other corrections, except bow height
correction, have been applied. Free surface 3.3.1 The hull form of column stabilized units
effects of the flooded well/recess are to be makes the calculations of geometric freeboard in
taken into account in stability calculations. accordance with the provisions of the Load Line
Convention impracticable. Therefore, the
b) The procedure described in (a) above is minimum freeboard of each column stabilized
also to apply in cases of small notches or unit is to be determined by meeting the
relatively narrow cut-outs at the stern of the applicable requirements for:
unit.
i) the strength of unit's structure
c) Narrow wing extensions at the stern of the ii) the minimum clearance between
unit are to be considered as appendages passing wave crests and deck structure
and excluded for the determination of length and
(L) and for the calculation of freeboards. IRS iii) intact and damage stability
will determine the effect of such wing requirements.
extensions with regard to the requirements
for the strength of the unit based upon 3.3.2 Windows, side scuttles and portlights,
length (L). including those of non-opening type or other
similar openings are not to be located below the
3.2.3 Self-elevating units - Load lines are to be deck structure of column stabilised units. The
assigned to self-elevating units as calculated position of openings which cannot be closed in
under the terms of the 1988 LL Protocol. When emergencies, such as air intakes for emergency
floating, or when in transit from one operational generators will be specially considered having
area to another, units are to be subjected to all regards to the intact righting arm curves and the
the conditions of assignment of that Protocol final waterline after assumed damage.
unless specifically excepted. However, these
units are not to be subject to the terms of that 3.3.3 The minimum freeboard is to be marked in
Protocol while they are supported by the seabed appropriate locations on the structure.
or are in the process of lowering or raising their
legs. 3.3.4 The enclosed deck structure of each
column-stabilized unit is to be made
3.2.4 The minimum freeboard of units which due weathertight.
to their configuration cannot be computed by the
End Of Chapter

Page 1 of 9
___________________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 6
Structures
Contents
Section
1 General
2 Common Structures
3 Structural Analysis
4 Welding, Workmanship and Inspections
5 Towing Arrangements
Section 1
General
1.1 Materials below and in Chapters 7, 8 and 9 relating to the

special requirements for individual types of
1.1.1 The scantling requirements specified in drilling units.
this chapter are intended for drilling units
constructed of steel which has been The scantling requirements of some structural
manufactured and tested according to the elements which are common feature of all
requirements given in Ch. 3. drilling units are given in Sec.2.
Where it is intended to use other approved 1.2.2 The primary structures of all units are to be
materials, the scantlings will be specially analysed as detailed in Sec.3.
considered.
Where a unit is not fitted with an acceptable
1.2 General requirements for scantlings corrosion protection system, the scantlings
determined on the basis of the structural
1.2.1 In general, the scantlings of major analysis are to be increased by corrosion
structural elements of all units are to comply additions appropriate to the environmental
with the applicable requirements of the Rules & conditions and usage of the relevant spaces.
Regulations For The Construction &
Classification of Steel Ships, except as noted

Page 2 of 9
Section 2
Common Structures
2.1 Structures supporting the drilling derrick 2.1.3 Moveable cantilever and skid beam testing
2.1.1 Substructures Prior to placing the unit in service, a functional

test of the longitudinal skidding arrangements of
Substructures supporting the drilling derrick, drill the moveable cantilever and skid beam as well
floor and associated equipment are to be as any transverse skidding arrangements such
analysed as required by Sec.3. Stresses are not as the sub-base (drill floor) is to be carried out
to exceed those permitted by Sec.3. by skidding the completed drilling structures with
derrick assembly to the maximum limits of
a) Individual Loads : Individual loads to be travel.
considered are the operating loads specified
by the owner or designer and should 2.2 Helicopter deck
include, but are not limited to the following,
as applicable: 2.2.1 General
 Dead load (steel weight, fixed a) Plans showing the arrangement, scantlings
equipment) and details of the helicopter deck are to be
 Floor load (personnel, moveable submitted for approval. The arrangement
equipment, material) plan is to show the overall size of the
 Snow or ice load helicopter deck and the designated landing
 Hook, setback, rotary table and riser area. If the arrangement provides for the
tensioner loads. securing of a helicopter or helicopters to the
deck, the predetermined position(s) selected
b) Combined Loads : Environmental loads to accommodate the secured helicopter, in
due to wind, including severe storm wind addition to the location of deck fittings for
load, are to be combined with the individual securing the helicopter, are to be shown.
loads indicated in a) to reflect the applicable The helicopter for which the deck is
operational requirements for the range of designed is to be specified, and calculations
anticipated conditions. Loads due to unit for the relevant loading conditions are to be
motions are to be considered for all afloat submitted. The particulars of helicopter used
conditions. for design purposes are to be included in
the Operating Booklet.
2.1.2 Substructure Supporting Arrangement
2.2.2 Structural design
Moveable cantilevers1) and skid beams2)
supporting substructures are to be analyzed as a) Scantlings of helicopter decks and
required by Sec.3. Stresses are not to exceed supporting structure are to be determined
those permitted by Sec.3. Loads imposed on the on the basis of the following design loading
hull structure are to include maximum reactions conditions in association with the allowable
from the cantilever or skid beam. stresses shown in Table 2.2.1.
Notes : b) Overall distributed loading: A minimum

distributed loading of 2 kN/m2 is to be taken
1) Moveable cantilever structures are those over the entire helicopter deck.
which extend beyond the hull structure during
drilling operations. y = specified minimum tensile yield stress of
the material
2) Moveable skid beam structures are those
which are fully supported by hull structure during * For members subjected to axial compression,
drilling operations. the yield stress or critical buckling stress,
whichever is less, is to be considered.

Page 3 of 9
___________________________________________________________________________________
perimeter of all floor or deck areas and openings
Table 2.2.1 : Allowable stresses for is to be protected with efficient guard rails or
helicopter decks bulwarks of height not less than 1 [m] above the
Allowable stress deck. Where this height would interfere with the
Girders, normal operation of the unit, a lesser height may
Loading stanchions, be considered. The clear opening below the
condition lowest course of the guard rails is not to exceed
Plating Beams truss
supports, 230 [mm]. The other courses are not to be more
etc than 380 [mm] apart. In the case of units with
rounded gunwales the guard rail supports are to
Overall 0.6 y
* be placed on the flat of the deck.
distributed (See 0.6 y 0.6 y
loading Note 1)
2.4 Means of access
Helicopter
landing *
# y 0.9 y 2.4.1 General
impact
loading 2.4.1.1 Each space within the unit should be
Stowed provided with at least one permanent means of
*
helicopter y 0.9 y 0.8 y access to enable, throughout the life of a unit,
loading overall and close-up inspections and thickness
measurements of the unit’s structures to be
# To the satisfaction of IRS, in association with carried out by IRS, the unit’s personnel and
the method of analysis presented. IRS may others as necessary. Such means of access
consider an allowable stress that exceeds y, should comply with the provisions of 2.7 and
provided the rationale of the analysis is with the technical provisions for means of
sufficiently conservative. access for inspections, adopted by the Maritime
Safety Committee by Resolution MSC.133(76).
Notes :
2.4.1.2 Where permanent means of access may
1) The thickness of plating for the overall be susceptible to damage during normal
distributed loading condition is not to be less operations or where it is impracticable to fit
than the minimum required by the Rules & permanent means of access, IRS may allow, in
Regulations For The Construction & lieu thereof, the provision of movable or portable
Classification of Steel Ships means of access, as specified in the technical
2) Helicopters fitted with landing gear other provisions, provided that the means of attaching,
than wheels shall be specially considered by rigging, suspending or supporting the portable
IRS. means of access forms a permanent part of the
3) Wind loadings and possible wave impact unit’s structure. All portable equipment are to be
loadings on helicopter decks are to be capable of being readily erected or deployed by
considered in a realistic manner, to the the unit’s personnel.
satisfaction of IRS.
2.4.2 Safe access to holds, tanks, ballast
c) Stowed helicopter loading: If provisions are tanks and other spaces
made to accommodate helicopters secured
to the deck in a predetermined position, the 2.4.2.1 Safe access to holds, cofferdams, tanks
structure is to be designed for a local and other spaces are to be direct from the open
loading equal to the manufacturer's deck and such as to ensure their complete
recommended wheel loadings at maximum inspection. Safe access may be from a
take-off weight, multiplied by a dynamic machinery space, pump-room, deep cofferdam,
amplification factor based on the predicted pipe tunnel, hold, double hull space or similar
motions of the unit for this condition. In compartment not intended for the carriage of oil
addition, a uniformly distributed loading of or hazardous materials where it is impracticable
0.5 [kN/m2], representing wet snow or ice, is to provide such access from an open deck.
to be considered, if applicable. For the
design of girders, stanchions, truss 2.4.2.2 Tanks and subdivisions of tanks, having
supports, etc., the structural weight of the a length of 35 [m] or more, are to be fitted with
helicopter deck is also to be considered. at least two access hatchways and ladders, as
far apart as practicable. Tanks less than 35 [m]
2.3 Bulwarks and guard rails in length is to be served by at least one access
hatchway and ladder. When a tank is subdivided
2.3.1 Except for helicopter landing decks and by one or more swash bulkheads or similar
areas not normally occupied, the unprotected obstructions which do not allow ready means of

Page 4 of 9
access to the other parts of the tank, at least two 2.4.3.2 For the purpose of this paragraph
hatchways and ladders are to be fitted. “critical structural areas” are locations which
have been identified from calculations to require
2.4.2.3 Each hold to be provided with at least monitoring or from the service history of similar
two means of access as far apart as practicable. or sister units to be sensitive to cracking,
In general, these accesses are to be arranged buckling, deformation or corrosion which would
diagonally, e.g. one access near the forward impair the structural integrity of the unit.
bulkhead on the port side, the other one near
the aft bulkhead on the starboard side. 2.4.4 General technical specifications
2.4.3 Access manual 2.4.4.1 For access through horizontal openings,

hatches or manholes, the dimensions should be
2.4.3.1 A unit’s means of access to carry out sufficient to allow a person wearing a self-
overall and close-up inspections and thickness contained air-breathing apparatus and protective
measurements are to be described in an access equipment to ascend or descend any ladder
manual which may be incorporated in the unit’s without obstruction and also provide a clear
operating manual. The manual is to be updated opening to facilitate the hoisting of an injured
as necessary and an updated copy maintained person from the bottom of a confined space.
onboard. The structure access manual is to The minimum clear opening is not to be less
include the following for each space: than 600 [mm] x 600 [mm]. When access to a
hold is arranged through a flush manhole in the
a) Plans showing the means of access to the deck or a hatch, the top of the ladder to be
space, with appropriate technical specifications placed as close as possible to the deck or hatch
and dimensions; coaming. Access hatch coamings having a
height greater than 900 [mm] is to also have
b) Plans showing the means of access within steps on the outside in conjunction with the
each space to enable an overall inspection to be ladder.
carried out, with appropriate technical
specifications and dimensions. The plans should 2.4.4.2 For access through vertical openings or
indicate from where each area in the space can manholes, in swash bulkheads, floors, girders
be inspected; and web frames providing passage through the
length and breadth of the space, the minimum
c) Plans showing the means of access within the opening is to be not less than 600 [mm] x 800
space to enable close-up inspections to be [mm] at a height of not more than 600 [mm] from
carried out, with appropriate technical the bottom shell plating unless gratings or other
specifications and dimensions. The plans are to footholds are provided.
be indicated with the positions of critical
structural areas, whether the means of access is 2.5 Anti-fouling systems
permanent or portable and from where each
area can be inspected; 2.5.1 If anti-fouling systems are installed, they
are to conform to the requirements of the
d) Instructions for inspecting and maintaining the International Convention on the Control of
structural strength of all means of access and Harmful Anti-fouling Systems on Ships, 2001.
means of attachment, taking into account any
corrosive atmosphere that may be within the 2.6 Protective coatings of dedicated
space; seawater ballast tanks
e) Instructions for safety guidance when rafting 2.6.1 All dedicated seawater ballast tanks are to
is used for close-up inspections and thickness be coated during construction. For the purpose
measurements; of this section pre-load tanks on self-elevating
units are to be considered dedicated seawater
f) Instructions for the rigging and use of any ballast tanks. Mat tanks and spud cans on such
portable means of access in a safe manner; units are not to be considered dedicated
seawater ballast tanks.
g) An inventory of all portable means of access;
and 2.6.2 Maintenance of the protective coating
system is to be included in the overall unit’s
h) Records of periodical inspections and maintenance scheme. The effectiveness of the
maintenance of the unit’s means of access. protective coating system is to be verified during
the life of a unit through periodical surveys.

Page 5 of 9
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 3
Structural Analysis
3.1 General to be determined in accordance with Part 3,

Chapter 3 Sec.4 of the Rules & Regulations for
3.1.1 The primary structure of the drilling unit is the Construction & Classification of Steel Ships.
to be analysed using the design loads given in
Chapter 4 and loading conditions stipulated c) Eccentric axial loading - Where appropriate,
below for determination of the resultant elastic deflections are to be taken into
stresses. Sufficient conditions, representative of account when determining the effects of
all modes of operation, are to be considered, to eccentricity of axial loading and the resulting
enable critical design cases to be determined. bending moments superimposed on the
Calculations for relevant conditions are to be bending moments computed for other types
submitted for review. The analysis is to be of loadings.
performed using an appropriate calculation
method and is to be fully documented and 3.1.6 Determination of shear stress : When
referenced. computing shear stresses in structural
members, only the effective shear area of the
For each loading condition considered, the web is to be considered. In this regard, the total
following stresses are to be determined and depth of the girder may be considered as the
these are not to exceed the appropriate web depth.
allowable stresses given in 3.2 or 3.3:
3.1.7 Equivalent stress criteria for plated
a) Stresses due to static loadings only, in calm structure
water conditions, where the static loads
include service load such as operational For plated structures, members may be
gravity loadings and weight of the unit, with designed according to the von Mises equivalent
the unit afloat or resting on the sea bed, as stress criterion, where the equivalent stress e is
applicable. defined as follows:
b) Stresses due to combined loadings, where

the applicable static loads in (a) are  e   x2   y2   x  y  3 xy 2
combined with relevant design
environmental loadings, including where,
acceleration and heeling forces.
x = stress in the x direction
3.1.2 Consideration of local stresses : Local
stresses, including those due to circumferential y = stress in the y direction
loading on tubular members, are to be added to
the primary stresses to determine total stress
xy = shear stress in the x-y plane.
levels.
3.1.8 Stress concentration : The effect of
3.1.3 Combination of stress components : The notches, stress raisers, and local stress
scantlings are to be determined on the basis of concentrations are to be taken into account in
a recognized method which combines, in a the design of load carrying elements.
rational manner, the individual stress
components acting on the various structural 3.1.9 Analysis and details of structural
elements of the unit. connections : Unless connections of structural
members are specifically detailed as hinged
3.1.4 Consideration of buckling : The critical joints, proper consideration is to be given in the
buckling stress of structural elements is to be structural analysis to the degree of restraint at
considered, where appropriate, in relation to the such connections. Structural connections are to
computed stresses. be detailed in such a manner as to ensure full
transmission of stresses between members
3.1.5 Determination of bending stresses : joined, and to minimize stress concentrations.
The following details are to be considered, as
a) Effective flange area - When computing may be appropriate.
bending stresses, the effective flange areas are

Page 6 of 9
stresses, are not to exceed the allowable

a) Shear web plates, continuous through the stresses specified in Table 3.2.2.
joint to transmit tension and compression
loads between members by means of shear
in the web plate. Table 3.2.2 : Allowable stresses for static
loading and combined loading
b) Flaring or transitioning of the joint, to lower
stress levels or to minimize concentrations Type of Static loading Combined
of stress or both. Stress (see 3.1.1 (a)) loading (see
3.1.1 (b))
c) Thicker joint material, high strength steel, or Tensile 0.6 x y 0.8 x y
both, consistent with good weldability, to
Bending 0.6 x (y or cr, 0.8 x (y or cr,
reduce the effect of high stress levels.
whichever is whichever is
smaller) smaller)
d) Brackets or other supplemental transition
members, with scallops and proper end Shearing 0.4 x y or 0.6 x 0.53 x y or 0.8
attachment details to minimize high stress cr, whichever is x cr, whichever
concentrations. smaller is smaller
Com- 0.6 x (y or cr, 0.8 x (y or cr,
Critical connections that depend upon the pressive whichever is whichever is
transmission of tensile stresses through the smaller) smaller)
thickness of the plating of one of the members
may result in lamellar tearing and are to be Where,
avoided wherever possible. Where unavoidable,
plate material with suitable through thickness (Z y = specified minimum tensile yield stress of
direction) properties may be required with the material [N/mm2]
appropriate inspection procedures.
cr, cr =critical compressive and shear buckling
3.1.10 Fatigue analysis - The possibility of stress, respectively, [N/mm2] depending on the
fatigue damage due to cyclic loading is to be dimensions, stiffening, boundary conditions,
considered in the design of self-elevating and loading pattern and material of the structural
column stabilized units. member under consideration. Reference may be
made to Part 3, Chapter 3 Sec.6 of the Rules &
The type and extent of the fatigue analysis will Regulations for the Construction & Classification
be dependent on the intended mode and area of of Steel Ships.
operations to be considered in the unit's design.
An appropriate loading spectrum in accordance b) The equivalent stress in plate elements
with accepted theories is to be used in the clear of discontinuities is generally not to
fatigue analysis. exceed 0.7 and 0.9 of the yield strength of
the material, for the loading conditions given
The fatigue life is to be based on a period of in 3.1.1(a) and (b), respectively.
time equal to the specified design life of the
structure. The period is normally not to be taken 3.3 Members subjected to combined axial
as less than 20 years. load and bending
3.1.11 Plastic analysis - Plastic analysis a) When structural members are subjected to
methods will be subject to special consideration. axial compression in combination with
compression due to bending, the computed
3.2 Allowable stresses stresses are to comply with the following
requirements:
3.2.1 General
When a/Fa  0.15 , a/Fa + b/Fb < 1.0
The scantlings of effective structural elements of
the primary frame of the unit, analysed in C mo  b
accordance with 3.1, are to be determined on When a/Fa > 0.15 , a/Fa + < 1.0
the basis of the allowable stresses specified (1   a / F' a )F b
herein.
and in addition, at ends of members:
3.2.2 Individual stresses
a/(0.6y) + b/Fb < 1.0
a) Individual stress components and where
applicable, direct combinations of such

Page 7 of 9
___________________________________________________________________________________
 for static loadings as defined 3.1.1 a), and where lateral deflection of end supports may
exist, K is not be considered less than 1.0.
a/(0.8y) + b/Fb < 1.0
r = radius of gyration (l, r to be in the same
 for combined loadings as defined in 3.1.1 b) units)
b) When structural members are subjected to Cmo = a coefficient as follows:

axial tension in combination with tension
due to bending, the computed stresses are 1) For compression members in frames subject
to comply with the following requirements: to joint translation (sideways)
a + b  0.6 y Cmo = 0.85
 for static loadings as defined 3.1.1 a), and 2) For restrained compression members in
frames braced against joint translation and
a + b  0.8 y not subject to transverse loading between
their supports, in the plane of bending:
 for combined loadings as defined in 3.1.1 b)
Cmo = 0.6 - 0.4 (M1 / M2)
However, the computed bending compressive
but not less than 0.4, where M1/M2 is the
stress, b, taken alone shall not exceed Fb
ratio of the smaller to larger moments at the
ends of that portion of the member un-
where,
braced in the plane of bending under
consideration. M1/M2 is positive when the
a = computed axial compressive or tensile
member is bent in reverse curvature and
stress
negative when it is bent is single curvature.
b = computed compressive or tensile stress 3) For compressive members in frames braced
due to bending against joint translation in the plane of
loading and subject to transverse loading
Fa = allowable axial compressive stress, which between their supports, the value of Cm may
is to be the least of the following: be determined by rational analysis.
However, in lieu of such analysis the
1) Allowable axial stress as per Table 3.2.2 following values may be used:
2) Overall buckling stress multiplied by factor a) for members whose ends are restrained,
of safety specified in 3.4 a) Cmo = 0.85;
3) Local buckling stress multiplied by factor of b) for members whose ends are unrestrained,
safety for axial stress. Cmo = 1.
Fb = allowable axial compressive stress due to 3.4 Column buckling stresses
bending, as per Table 3.2.2. (Only local buckling
related cr to be considered). a) Overall buckling : For compression
members which are subject to overall
F'e = E/1.92 , the limiting Euler buckling stress. column buckling, the critical buckling stress
May be increased by 1/3 for combined loadings is to be obtained from the following
as defined in 3.1.1 b) equations:
 2E cr = E, when E  0.5 y

E 
(K l ) 2
r  y 
cr = y, 1   , when E > 0.5 y
 4 E 
E = Modulus of elasticity [N/mm2] 
l = unsupported length of column where E is as defined in 3.3 b)
K = effective length factor which accounts for The factor of safety, , for overall
support conditions at ends of length l. For cases column buckling is to be as follows:

Page 8 of 9
For static loading as defined in 3.1.1 a) appropriate, in addition to overall buckling

as specified in a) above.
 = 0.52, when E < 0.5 y
0 .6 Unstiffened or ring-stiffened cylindrical
 , when E  0.5 y shells subjected to axial compression or
1  0.15  y / 2 E compression due to bending, and having
proportions which satisfy the following
and, for combined loadings as defined in 3.1.1b) relationship, are to be checked for local
buckling in addition to the overall buckling.
 = 0.70, when E < 0.5 y
D E

0 .8 t 9 y
 , when E < 0.5 y
1  0.15  y / 2 E
where,
b) Local buckling : Members which are D = mean diameter [mm]
subjected to axial compression or
compression due to bending, are to be t = wall thickness [mm]
investigated for local buckling, as
Section 4
Welding, Workmanship and Inspection
4.1 General
4.3.2 As a minimum the following welds are to
4.1.1 The welding, workmanship and inspection be subjected to 100% nondestructive testing
are in general to be as required by Rules & (Radiographic, ultrasonic, magnetic particle,
Regulations For The Construction & dye-penetrant, or equivalent). In addition to
Classification of Steel Ships, however, following surface nondestructive testing, at least 20% of
special requirements are to be complied with. full penetration welded joints in primary structure
and all full penetration welded joints in special
4.2 Thickness in excess of 50 mm application structure are to be subjected to
100% radiographic or ultrasonic inspection.
4.2.1 Special precautions, with regard to joint Additional nondestructive testing may be
preparation, pre-heat, welding sequence, heat required by the Surveyor.
input and interpass temperature, are to be taken
for welding thick sections. Ultrasonic inspection a) Self-elevating units - Weld joints of lattice-
to insure the absence of injurious laminations type leg structure (including chords, braces,
may be required for material used where racks, and rack attachments),
through-thickness (Z direction) properties are circumferential joints of cylindrical-type legs,
important. Stress relieving, when specified, is to structure in way of leg guides and jack
be carried out using an approved method. house attachments to deck, and
attachments of legs to spud cans or mat.
4.3 Extent of inspection of welds
b) Column stabilised units - Weld attachments
4.3.1 All welds are to be subject to visual of columns to pontoons or lower hulls,
inspection. Representative nondestructive braces to column, columns to upper hull,
testing is to be carried out to the satisfaction of braces to upper hull, brace-to-brace
the Surveyor. Such testing is to be carried out intersections, and in way of any temporary
after all forming and post weld heat treatment. access closures or inserts in main
Welds which are inaccessible or difficult to structures.
inspect in service may be subjected to increased
levels of nondestructive inspection. A plan for
nondestructive testing is to be submitted.

Page 9 of 9
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 5
Towing Arrangements
5.1 The design and arrangement of towing of the Rules and Regulations for the
fittings are to have regard to both normal and Construction and Classification of Steel Ships,
emergency conditions.
5.3 Each fitting or item of equipment is to be
5.2 Arrangements, equipment and fittings clearly marked with any restrictions associated
provided in accordance with 5.1 are to meet the with its safe operation, taking into account the
requirements of the Part 3, Chapter 15, Sec. 6.3 strength of its attachment to the unit’s structure.
End Of Chapter

Page 1 of 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 7
Self-Elevating Drilling Units
Contents
Section
1 General
2 Structural Considerations
Section 1
General
1.1 Application and drilling loads in both normal drilling and

severe storm conditions as follows:
1.1.1 This Chapter applies to self-elevating
drilling units as defined in Ch. 1, Sec. 2.10 a). a) Normal Drilling Condition : Units are
assumed to have minimum design variable
1.2 Wave clearance loads and the cantilever in the most
unfavourable position with the associated
1.2.1 The unit is to be designed for a crest design drilling load.
clearance of either 1.2 m or 10% of the
combined storm tide, astronomical tide and b) Severe Storm Condition : Units are
height of the maximum wave crest above the assumed to have minimum design variable
mean low water level, whichever is less, loads and the cantilever in the design
between the underside of the unit in the position.
elevated position and the crest of the design
wave. This crest elevation is to be measured 1.4.2 Units with individual footings are to have
above the level of the combined astronomical righting moments calculated about the most
and storm tides. unfavourable axis though the center of one or
more footings and are to have a minimum factor
1.3 Sea bed conditions of safety of 1.1 for the conditions defined above.
1.3.1 Classification will be based upon the 1.4.3 Units with a mat, are to have righting
designer's assumptions regarding sea bed moments calculated about the most highly
conditions. These assumptions are to be stressed edge of the mat and are to have a
recorded in the Operating Booklet. It is the minimum factor of safety of 1.3 for the
responsibility of the operator to ensure that conditions defined above.
actual conditions do not impose more sever
loadings on the unit. 1.5 Preload capability
1.4 Safety against overturning 1.5.1 For units without bottom mats, all legs are
to have the capability of being preloaded to the
1.4.1 Safety against overturning : Units which maximum applicable combined gravity plus
are to rest on the sea bed are to have sufficient overturning load. The approved preload
positive downward gravity loadings on the procedure is to be included in the Operating
support footings or mat to withstand the Booklet.
overturning moment due to the combined
environmental loads from any direction with the 1.6 Field transit moves
lateral deflection of the legs taken into
consideration. 1.6.1 Field transit moves may only be
undertaken when the predicted weather is such
The safety against overturning is to be assessed that the anticipated motions of the unit will not
using the most unfavourable direction and exceed the design condition. The duration of a
combination of environmental, gravity, variable field transit move may be for a considerable

Chapter 7 Self-Elevating Drilling Units
Page 2 of 3
period of time and should be related to the the move, the unit is not normally to be more
accuracy of weather forecasting in the area than a six hour voyage to a protected location or
concerned. Such a move should not normally a location where the unit may be safely
exceed a twelve hour voyage between protected elevated. The approved condition is to be
locations, or locations where the unit may be included in the Operating Manual.
safely elevated; however, during any portion of
Section 2
Structural Considerations
2.1 General 2.2.3 Legs in the field transit condition - The legs
are to have sufficient strength for the bending
2.1.1 The hull is to be considered as a complete moment 'M' obtained from the following formula:
structure having sufficient strength to resist all
induced stresses while in the elevated position M = M1 + 1.2 M2 [N-m]
and supported by all legs. All fixed and variable
loads are to be distributed, using an accepted M1 = Dynamic bending moment caused by a 6-
method of rational analysis, from the various degree single amplitude of roll or pitch at the
points of application to the supporting legs. The natural period of the unit [N-m]
scantlings of the hull are then to be determined
consistent with this load distribution, in M2 = Static bending moment due to gravity
accordance with Chapter 6. caused by a 6-degree legs' angle of inclination
[N-m].
2.1.2 The conditions valid for towing/
conveyances, for the elevating and lowering Special consideration, based on submitted data,
procedures and for the operating phases, while will be given to angles of inclination less than 6
standing on the sea floor, shall be clearly degrees when the separation between the
indicated in the Operating Manual (see Ch.1, bottom of the hull and the top of the mat or the
Sec.2). lower tip of the spud can exceeds 15% of the
maximum separation.
2.1.3 For the elevated position, special attention
is to be paid to the distribution of the loads from The legs are to be investigated for any proposed
the supporting points (legs) into the hull leg arrangement with respect to vertical position
structure, taking account also of possible load during field transit moves, and the approved
redistributions resulting from lack of support at positions are to be specified in the Operating
one leg. Booklet. Such investigation is to include strength
and stability aspects.
2.1.4 Deckhouses located near the side shell of
a unit may be required to have scantlings similar 2.2.4 Legs in the ocean transit condition - Legs
to those of an unprotected house front. Other are to be designed for acceleration and gravity
deckhouses are to have scantlings suitable for moments resulting from the motions in the most
their size, function and location. severe anticipated environmental transit
conditions, together with corresponding wind
2.2 Legs moments.
2.2.1 Leg types - Legs may be either shell type The legs are to have sufficient strength for the
or truss type. Shell type legs may be designed bending moment 'M' obtained from the following
as either stiffened or unstiffened shells. In formula:
addition, individual footing may be fitted or legs
may be permanently attached to a bottom mat. M = M3 + 1.2 M4 [N-m]
2.2.2 Legs without mats - Where footings or M3 = Dynamic bending moment caused by a 15-
mats are not fitted, proper consideration is to be degree single amplitude of roll or pitch at a 10-
given to the leg penetration of the sea bed and second period [N-m]
the end fixity of the leg.

Page 3 of 3
___________________________________________________________________________________
M4 = Static bending moment due to gravity 2.2.9 Leg scantlings: Leg scantlings are to be
caused by a 15-degree legs' angle of inclination determined in accordance with the requirements
[N-m] of Chapter 6.
For ocean transit conditions, it may be 2.3 Structure in way of jacking or other
necessary to reinforce or support the legs, or to elevating arrangements
remove sections of them. The approved
condition is to be included in the Operating 2.3.1 Load carrying members which transmit
Booklet. loads from the legs to the hull are to be
designed for the maximum design loads and are
2.2.5 Condition - while lowering to bottom: Legs to be so arranged that loads transmitted from
are to be designed to withstand the dynamic the legs are properly diffused into the hull
loads which may be encountered by their structure.
unsupported length just prior to touching bottom,
and also to withstand the shock of touching 2.3.2 The structure surrounding the legs (points
bottom while the unit is afloat and subject to of support) shall be designed with particular
wave and wind motions. regard to the introduction of local concentrated
forces; main load bearing elements should be
The maximum design motions, bottom continuous in the vertical direction. Regarding
conditions and sea state while lowering legs are the maximal force to be transmitted, preloading
to be clearly indicated in the Operating Booklet, of the legs shall be considered.
and the legs are not to be permitted to touch
bottom when the site conditions exceed the 2.3.3 For loose elements, e.g. bars, rods, bolts,
allowable. pins, serving for transmission of forces to
support the unit, special requirements may be
2.2.6 The effect of possible scouring action (loss imposed regarding dimensioning safety factors
of bottom support) is to be considered. The and testing.
effect of skirt plates, where provided, is to be
given special consideration. 2.4 Bottom mat
2.2.7 Condition while elevating the unit - the legs 2.4.1 When the bottoms of the legs are attached
are to be designed to withstand the loads acting to a mat, particular attention is to be given to the
on both, the unit's hull and the legs themselves, attachment and the framing and bracing of the
during the elevating procedure. The mat, in order that the loads transmitted between
environmental conditions are the same as the legs and the mat are properly distributed.
foreseen for lowering of the legs. The analysis The boundary plating of tanks which are not
may have to be done for several intermediate vented freely to the sea is not to be less in
positions of the hull. thickness than would be required by the Rules
for tanks, using a head to the design water level,
2.2.8 Unit in the elevated position - when taking into account the astronomical and storm
computing the stresses in legs, the maximum tides. The mat is to be further investigated while
overturning load on the unit, using the most resting on the sea bed with 20% of the bottom
adverse combination of applicable variable earing area washed away due to scouring. The
loadings together with the loading as outlined in effects of skirt plates, where provided, will be
Ch. 4, is to be considered. Forces and moments specially considered. Mats are to be designed to
due to lateral frame deflections of the legs are to withstand the shock of touching bottom while the
be taken into account. unit is afloat and subject to wave motions.
End Of Chapter

Page 1 of 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 8
Column Stabilized Drilling Units
Contents
Section
1 General
Section 1
General
1.1 Application of operation, taking into account the

predicted motion of the unit relative to the
1.1.1 This Chapter applies to the unit type as surface of the sea. Calculations, model test
defined in Ch. 1, Sec. 2, Cl. 10(b). results, or prototype experiences are to be
submitted for consideration.
1.2 Wave clearance
1.2.2 On-bottom condition
1.2.1 Afloat condition
a) For on-bottom modes of operation,
a) Unless deck structures are designed for clearances are to be in accordance with
wave impact, reasonable clearance those specified in Ch. 7 for self- elevating
between the deck structures and the wave units.
crests is to be ensured for all afloat modes
Section 2
2.1 General c) Where a column, lower hull or footing is a

part of the overall structural frame of a unit,
2.1.1 Special considerations regarding stresses consideration is also to be given to stresses
- For unit of this type, the highest stresses in resulting from deflections due to the
some members may be associated with less applicable combined loading.
severe environmental conditions than the
maximum specified by the owner (designer). Particular attention is also to be given to the
Where considered necessary, account is to be details of structural design in critical areas such
taken of the consequent increased possibility of as bracing members, joint connections, etc.
encounter of significant stress levels, by either
or both of the following: 2.1.2 For units designed to be supported by the
seabed the clearance in paragraph Chapter 7,
a) Suitable reduction of the allowable stress 1.2.1 is to be maintained.
levels for combined loadings given in Ch. 6,
Sec.3. 2.1.3 Local structures in way of fairleads,
winches, etc., forming part of the position
b) Detailed investigation of the fatigue mooring system, are to be designed to withstand
properties in order to evaluate the possibility forces equivalent to the breaking strength of the
of high stresses in association with mooring line.
probability of occurrence.

Page 2 of 4
2.1.4 Where a bridge is provided for access 2.2.6 Upper structure not subjected to wave
from the shore, the jointed part of the hull with loading
the bridge is to be sufficiently strengthened.
Where it can be shown that the upper structure
2.1.5 For contact with other ships, the unit is to is not subject to wave loading or is required in
be equipped with sufficient fenders and any mode of operation to be watertight or
particular attention is to be given to the weathertight, there need be no overall
reinforcement of shell plating, frames, girders, consideration of tightness or buoyant load
etc. forces.
2.1.6 Conditions for towing/conveyances, for 2.2.7 Buoyant upper structure

ballasting/deballasting procedures and mooring
operations shall be clearly indicated in the Where the upper structure is designed to be
Operating Manual. buoyant in any mode of operation or damaged
condition or to meet any stability requirement, it
2.2 Upper structure will be subject to special consideration.
2.2.1 The scantlings of the upper structure are 2.2.8 Storage tanks on upper decks
not to be less than those required by the Rules
and Regulations for the Construction & Storage tanks built into or on upper decks are to
Classification of Steel Ships in association with have scantlings as required for ship's integral
the loadings indicated on the deck loading plan. tanks.
(which are not to be less than the minimum
specified in Ch.4, Sec.6). In addition, when the 2.3 Columns, lower hulls and footings
upper structure is considered to be an effective
member of the overall structural frame of the 2.3.1 Main stability columns, lower hulls or
unit, the scantlings are to be sufficient to footings may be designed as either framed or
withstand actual local loadings plus any unframed shells. In either case, framing, ring
additional loadings superimposed due to frame stiffeners, bulkheads or other suitable
action, within the stress limitations given in Ch.6, diaphragms which are used are to be sufficient
Sec.3. to maintain shape and stiffness under all the
anticipated loadings in association with
2.2.2 When the upper structure is designed to established shell analysis methods.
be waterborne in any mode of operation or
damaged condition, or to meet stability Portlights or windows including those of the non-
requirements, it will be subject to special opening type, or other similar openings, are not
consideration. to be fitted in columns.
2.2.3 Special attention is to be paid to the 2.3.2 Where columns, lower hulls or footings are
foundations (supporting structure) and fastening designed with stiffened plating, the minimum
of drilling derrick(s) (see also Ch.6, Sec.2), scantlings of plating, framing, girders, etc., may
cranes and similar installations. be determined in accordance with the
requirements of ship's integral tanks.
2.2.4 The upper structure, including the opening
parts of the well, etc., is to be good in the a) Tank spaces : Where the internal space is a
continuity of longitudinal strength and transverse tank, the head h is to be taken to a point
strength. Scantlings of structural elements are to located at two-thirds of the distance from the
be as per Pt.3, Ch.9 of Rules and Regulation for top of the tank to the top of the overflow, or
the Construction and Classification of Steel to a point 0.91 [m] above the top of the tank,
Ships. whichever is grater. For tanks intended to
carry contents with a specific gravity in
2.2.5 Deckhouses fitted to the upper structure excess of 1.05, the head is to be increased
are to be designed in accordance with the Rules by a factor equal to the ratio of the specified
and Regulations for the Construction & gravity to 1.0.
Classification of Steel Ships, with due
consideration given to their location and to the b) Void compartment spaces : Where an
environmental conditions in which the unit will internal space is a void compartment, the
operate. design head used in association with the
above is not to be less than that
corresponding to the maximum allowable
waterline of the unit in service.

Page 3 of 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
c) Areas subjected to wave immersion : For all  for a broad mat type (lower hull)
areas subject to wave immersion, a support, 20% of the bottom bearing area
minimum head of 6.0 m is to be used. is to be considered unsupported.
d) Minimum scantling : In general, the  when there are individual footings or

scantlings are not to be less than required pads, any one such support is to be
for watertight bulkheads in association with considered unsupported on 50% of its
a head equivalent to the maximum bottom bearing area.
damaged waterline.
 other configurations will be specially
2.3.3 Where columns, lower hulls or footings do considered.
not incorporate framing members and are
designed as shells, either unstiffened or ring Where skirt plates are provided their
stiffened, the minimum scantlings of shell plating effectiveness in preventing loss of bottom
and ring stiffeners are to be determined on the support due to scouring will be specially
basis of established shell analysis using the considered.
appropriate factor of safety and the design
heads as given in 2.3.2. 2.3.5 Bracing members
2.3.4 Additional structural requirements a) Stresses in bracing members due to all

anticipated loadings are to be determined in
a) Provision for wave and current loadings : accordance with the following requirements
Scantlings of columns, lower hulls or footing in conjunction with the relevant
as determined by 2.3.2 and 2.3.3 are requirements of Ch.6, Sec.3.
minimum requirements for hydrostatic
pressure loads. Where wave and current b) Arrangement of braces : Where braces are
forces are superimposed, the local structure essential for the structural integrity of the
of the shell is to be increased in scantlings unit, they should be so arranged that they
as necessary, to meet the strength are protected as far as possible against boat
requirements of Ch.6, Sec.3. impact (collisions) and other forces resulting
from normal operations.
b) Provision for frame action : When the
column, lower hull or footing is an effective c) Loading conditions : Bracing members are
member of the overall structural frame of the to be designed to transmit loadings and to
unit, the scantlings are to be sufficient to make the structure effective against
meet these requirements plus any additional environmental forces and, when the unit is
stresses superimposed due to frame action, supported by the seabed, against the
within the stress limitations of Ch.6, Sec.3. possibility of uneven bearing loads.
Although designed primarily as brace
c) Consideration for high local loading : members of the overall structure under the
Particular consideration is to be given to designated loadings, the bracing must also
structural details, reinforcement, etc., in be investigated, if applicable, for
areas subject to high local loadings, or to superimposed local bending stresses due to
such loadings that may cause shell buoyancy, wave and current forces.
distortion; for example:
d) Effect of wave impact : Where relevant,
 bottom bearing loads, where applicable; consideration is to be given to local stresses
due to wave impact.
 partially filled tanks;
e) Reinforcement of tabular bracing members :
 local strength against external damage; When bracing members are of tubular
section, ring frames may be required to
 continuity through joints; maintain stiffness and roundness of shape.
 wave impacts. f) Watertight bracing members : Underwater

bracing members are normally to be made
d) Scouring consideration : For units designed watertight. When bracings are watertight,
to rest on the sea bed, the effect of scouring they are to be suitably designed to prevent
action (partial loss of bottom support) is to collapse from external hydrostatic pressure.
be considered as follows: They are to be accessible for internal
inspection, or else adequate means are to

Page 4 of 4
be provided in order to detect leakages at be less than 80% of the loads

an early stage. associated with severe storm
condition.
Openings in columns : Portlights or other
similar openings are not to be fitted to iii) Notwithstanding the kind of stress,
columns. the allowable stress at the
combined loads condition is to be
2.4 Structural redundancy following formula:
2.4.1 When assessing structural redundancy for a = y

column stabilized units, the following assumed
damage conditions apply: a = allowable stress [N/mm2]
a) The unit's structure is to be able to y = specified yield stress of materials

withstand the loss of any slender bracing [N/mm2]
member without causing overall collapse of
the unit's structure. iv) When taking into consideration
redistribution of forces due to
b) Structural redundancy is to be based on the yielding or buckling and overall
applicable design load requirements of Ch.4 strength is to be satisfied with (a),
except: the criteria of allowable stress may
be exceeded for local stress.
i) When considering environmental
loads such as wind force, wave 2.4.2 The structural arrangement of the upper
forcing etc. minimum one year hull is to be considered with regard to the
return period may be assumed for structural integrity of the unit after the failure of
intended operations. any primary girder.
ii) When considering environmental

factors, the applied loads are not to
End Of Chapter

Page 1 of 1
___________________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 9
Surface Type Drilling Units
Contents
Section
1 General
Section 1
General
1.1 Application
1.1.1 This Chapter applies to the surface type

drilling units as defined in Ch. 1, Sec. 2.10 c).
Section 2
2.1 General stiffened to prevent damage due to foreign

objects which may become trapped in the well
2.1.1 Scantlings of the hull structure of both ship while the drilling unit is under way.
type and barge type drilling units are, in general,
to comply with the applicable requirements of 2.2.2 The deck area in way of large hatches is to
Rules and Regulations for the Construction & be suitably compensated where necessary to
Classification of Steel Ships as mentioned in maintain the strength of the drilling unit.
Chapter 6. Special consideration will be given in
respect of the following items which may require 2.3 Concentrated loads
some deviation or additions to the Rules.
2.3.1 The structure in way of heavy
2.2 Strength in way of drilling well and large concentrated loads resulting from the drilling
hatches derrick, pipe rack, set back, drilling mud storage,
etc., is to be suitably reinforced.
2.2.1 The required strength of the drilling unit is
to be maintained in way of the drilling well, and 2.3.2 Local structure in way of fairleads,
particular attention is to be paid to the transition winches, etc., forming part of the position
of fore and aft members so as to maintain mooring system, is to be designed to the
continuity of the longitudinal material. In breaking strength of the mooring line.
addition, the plating of the well is to be suitably
End Of Chapter

Page 1 of 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 10
Temporary Mooring Equipment and Position Keeping

Systems and Equipment
Contents
Section
1 General
2 Temporary Mooring Equipment
3 Position Keeping Systems and Equipment - Anchoring Systems
Section 1
General
1.1 Application
1.1.2 Drilling units provided with position
1.1.1 All drilling units are to be provided with keeping systems and equipment in accordance
equipment necessary for their temporary with the requirements of Section 3 will be
mooring in accordance with the requirements of eligible for the optional class notation PM.
Section 2.
Section 2
Temporary Mooring Equipment
2.1 Anchors, chain cables, wire ropes and

windlass 2.1.2 Where equipment is provided for keeping
position during operations, the same may be
2.1.1 Anchors, chain cables, wire ropes and accepted in lieu of the equipment specified in
windlass necessary for temporary mooring of 2.1.1 provided it can be released in an
the units are to be provided in accordance with emergency during any transit condition and its
the requirements of Part 3, Chapter 15 of Rules mooring effect can be considered equivalent or
and Regulations for the Construction & more.
Classification of Steel Ships.
Section 3
Position Keeping Systems and Equipment - Anchoring Systems
3.1 General Provisions should be made on board for the

recording of changes to and inspection of the
3.1.1 The anchors, cables, shackles and equipment.
other associated connecting equipment
should be designed, manufactured and tested 3.1.2 Plans showing the arrangement and
in accordance with the requirements of Part 2, complete details of the anchoring system,
Chapter 10 of Rules and Regulations for the including anchors, shackles, anchor line
Construction & Classification of Steel Ships. consisting of chain, wire or rope, together with
Documentation of testing, where applicable, details of fairleads, windlasses, winches, and
should be maintained on board the unit. any other components of the anchoring system

Chapter 10 Temporary Mooring Equipment and Position Keeping Systems and Equipment
Page 2 of 4
and their foundations are to be submitted for factor of safety at the maximum excursion of the
approval. unit for a range of headings is to be considered:
3.2 Design
Design Condition FOS
3.2.1 An analysis of the anchoring arrangements Operating 2.7
expected to be utilized in the units' operation is
to be submitted for approval. Among the items Severe storm 1.8
to be addressed are: Operating - one line failed 1.8
Severe storm - one line failed 1.25
i) Design environmental conditions of
waves, winds, currents, tides and
ranges of water depth.
where,
ii) Air and sea temperature.
iii) Ice conditions (if applicable). PB

FOS =
Tmax
iv) Description of analysis methodology
Tmax = characteristic tension in
3.2.2 The anchoring system is to be designed so
the anchor line, equal to the
that a sudden failure of any single component
maximum value obtained
will not cause progressive failure of remaining
according to 3.9.2(e)
anchoring arrangements.
PB = minimum rated breaking
3.2.3 Anchoring system components are to be
strength of the anchor line
designed utilizing adequate factors of safety
(FOS) and a design methodology suitable to
Operating
identify the most severe loading condition for
condition : the most severe design
each component. In particular, sufficient number
environmental condition for
of heading angles together with the most severe
normal operations as defined by
combination of wind, current and wave are to be
the owner or designer
considered, usually from the same direction, to
determine the maximum tension in each
Severe
mooring line. When a particular site is being
Storm
considered, any applicable cross-sea conditions
condition: the most severe design
are also to be considered in the event that they
environmental condition for
might induce higher mooring loads.
severe storm as defined by the
owner or designer
3.2.4 When the Quasi Static Method is applied,
the tension in each anchor line is to be
Operating,
calculated at the maximum excursion for each
One line failed: following the failure of any one
design condition defined in 3.2.5, combining the
mooring line in the operating
following steady and dynamic responses of the
condition
Unit.
Severe storm,
i) steady mean offset due to the defined
One line failed: following the failure of any one
wind, current, and steady wave forces;
mooring line in the severe storm
condition
ii) most probable maximum wave induced
motions of the moored unit due to wave
When a dynamic analysis is employed, other
excitation.
safety factors may be specially considered by
IRS.
For relatively deep water, the effect from
damping and inertia forces in the anchor lines is
The defined Operating and Severe Storm
to be considered in the analysis. The effects of
conditions are to be the same as those identified
slowly varying motions are to be included for
for the design of the unit, unless IRS is satisfied
drilling units when the magnitudes of such
that lesser condition may be applicable to
motions are considered to be significant.
specific sites.
3.2.5 When the Quasi-Static Method outlined in
3.2.4 above is applied, the following minimum

Page 3 of 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
3.2.6 In general, the maximum wave induced holding against 50 percent of the total
motions of the moored unit about the steady static braking capacity of the windlass.
mean offset is to be obtained by means of
model tests. Analytical calculations may be iv) Each windlass is to be capable of being
accepted provided that the proposed method is controlled from a position which
based on a sound methodology validated by provides a good view of the operation.
model tests.
3.3.2 Fairleads and Sheaves
In the consideration of column stabilized drilling
units, the value of CS and CH, as given in i) Fairleads and sheaves are to be
Chapter 4 may be used in the analysis for designed to prevent excessive bending
position keeping mooring systems. and wear of the anchor lines. The
attachments to the hull or structure are
3.2.7 IRS may accept different analysis to be such as to withstand the stresses
methodologies provided that it is satisfied that a imposed when an anchor line is loaded
level of safety equivalent to the one obtained by to its breaking strength.
3.2.4 and 3.2.5 above is ensured.
3.3.3 Anchor line
3.2.8 IRS may give special consideration to an
arrangement where the anchoring systems are i) The anchor lines are to be of a type that
used in conjunction with thrusters to maintain will satisfy the design conditions of the
the unit on station. anchoring system and may be of wire,
rope, chain or any combination thereof.
3.2.9 Dynamic positioning systems Details are to be submitted.
Dynamic positioning systems used as a sole Chains and accessories are to be in accordance
means of position keeping are to provide a level with the requirements of Part 2, Chapter 10,
of safety equivalent to that provided for Sec. 5 of Rules and Regulations for the
anchoring arrangements(Refer to Guidance for Construction & Classification of Steel Ships.
dynamic position system (DP) operator training
(MSC.1/Circ.738/Rev.1) and Guidelines for ii) Means are to be provided to enable the
vessels with dynamic positioning systems anchor lines to be released from the unit
(MSC/Circ.645)). after loss of main power.
3.3 Equipment iii) Means are to be provided for measuring

anchor line tensions and windlass
3.3.1 Windlasses power load and to indicate the amount
of cable paid out.
i) The design of the windlass is to provide
for adequate dynamic braking capacity iv) Anchor lines are to be of adequate
to control normal combinations of loads length to prevent uplift of the anchors
from the anchor, anchor line and anchor under the maximum design condition for
handling vessel during the deployment the anticipated areas(s) of operation.
of the anchors at the maximum design
payout speed of the windlass. The 3.3.4 Anchors
attachment of the windlass to the hull
structure is to be designed to withstand i) The type and design of anchors are to
the breaking strength of the anchor line. be submitted for approval together with
the documentation estimating their
ii) Each windlass is to be provided with two holding down power in various types of
independent power operated brakes soil.
and each brake is to be capable of
holding against a static load in the ii) All anchors are to be suitably stowed to
anchor lines of at least 50 percent of its prevent movement during transit.
breaking strength. Where deemed
appropriate by IRS, one of the brakes 3.3.5 Control Stations
may be replaced by a manually
operated brake. i) A manned control station is to be
provided with means to indicate and
iii) On loss of power to the windlasses, the automatically record anchor line
power operated braking system is to be tensions at the individual windlass
automatically applied and be capable of

Chapter 10 Temporary Mooring Equipment and Position Keeping Systems and Equipment
Page 4 of 4
control positions and to indicate wind ii) Reliable means are to be provided to
speed and direction. communicate between locations critical
to the anchoring operation.
An alarm for maximum limit of anchor
line tension is to be provided at the iii) Means are to be provided at the
control station with facility for remote individual windlass control positions to
release of anchor line tension. monitor anchor line tension. Windlass
power load and to indicate amount of
anchor line payed out.
End Of Chapter

Page 1 of 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 11
Hazardous Areas
Contents
Section
1 General
2 Classification of Areas
3 Ventilation
4 Dangerous Goods
Section 1
General
1.1 General to get ignited are not likely to

occur, and if it does occur, it will
1.1.1 The drilling units are to be classified into only exist for a short time.
hazardous areas in accordance with 1.1.2 and
1.1.3 or alternatively with an acceptable code of 1.1.4 The hazardous areas defined in 1.2.1 -
practice. 1.2.3 are those which normally apply to offshore
drilling units for oil and gas exploration.
1.1.2 Hazardous areas are all those areas Equipment for well testing if present is to be
where, due to the possible presence of a specially considered.
flammable atmosphere arising from the drilling
operations, the use without proper consideration The hazardous areas as specified may be
of machinery or electrical equipment may lead to extended or reduced depending on the actual
fire hazard or explosion. arrangements in each case, by use of
windshields, special ventilation arrangements,
1.1.3 Hazardous areas are subdivided into structural arrangements (e.g. low deck head),
Zones 0, 1 or 2, the definitions of each category etc.
being as follows:
1.1.5 For the purpose of this section:
Zone 0 is an area in which flammable
gases or vapours of such i) An enclosed space is considered to be
concentrations which are liable a space bounded by bulkheads and
to get ignited are continuously decks which may have doors, windows,
present or present for long or other similar openings.
periods.
ii) A semi-enclosed location is considered
Zone 1 is an area in which flammable to be a location where natural conditions
gases or vapours of such of ventilation are notably different from
concentrations which are liable those on open decks due to the
to get ignited are likely to occur presence of structure such as roofs,
in normal operating conditions. windbreaks and bulkheads and which
are so arranged that the dispersion of
Zone 2 is an area in which flammable gas may not occur.
gases or vapours of such
concentrations which are liable

Page 2 of 4
Section 2
Classification of Areas
2.1 General the mud pump suction connection at the

mud pit.
2.1.1 Hazardous areas of Zone 0 include:
ii) Outdoor locations within the boundaries
The internal spaces of closed tanks and piping of the drilling derrick upto a height of 3
containing: m above the drill floor.
i. active non-degassed drilling mud, or,
ii. oil that has a closed-cup flashpoint iii) Semi-enclosed derricks to the extent of
below 60°C, or, their enclosures above the drill floor or
iii. flammable gas and vapour, or, to a height of 3 m above the drill floor,
iv. produced oil and gas, whichever is greater.
e.g. escape gas outlet pipes, or spaces in which
an oil-gas-air mixture is continuously iv) Semi-enclosed locations below and
present or present for long periods. continuous with the drill floor and to the
boundaries of the derrick or to the
2.1.2 Hazardous areas of Zone 1 include: extent of any enclosure which is liable to
trap gases.
i) Enclosed spaces containing any part of
the mud-circulating system that has an v) Outdoor locations below the drill floor
opening into the spaces and is between and within a radius of 1.5 [m] area
the well and the final degassing beyond the zone 1 area as specified in
discharge. paragraph 2.1.2(v).
ii) In outdoor or semi-enclosed locations vi) The areas 1.5 m beyond the Zone 1
except as provided for in (iv), the area areas specified in 2.1.2(ii) and beyond
within 1.5 m of the boundaries of any the semi-enclosed locations specified in
openings to equipment which is part of 2.1.2(iv).
the mud system as specified in (i), any
ventilation outlets of Zone 1 spaces, or vii) Outdoor spaces within 1.5 m of the
any access to Zone 1 spaces. boundaries of any ventilation outlet from
or access to a Zone 2 space.
iii) Pits, ducts or similar structures in
locations which otherwise would be viii) Air locks between a Zone 1 and a non-
Zone 2 but which are arranged so that hazardous areas.
the dispersion of gas may not occur.
2.2 Openings, access and ventilation condi-
iv) Enclosed spaces or semi-enclosed tions affecting the extent of hazardous
locations that are below the drill floor zones.
and contain a possible source of release
such as the top of a drilling nipple. 2.2.1 Except for operational reasons access
doors or other openings are not to be provided
v) Outdoor locations below the drill floor between:
and within a radius of 1.5 [m] from a
possible source of release such as the - a non-hazardous space and a
top of a drilling nipple. hazardous zone;
vi) Enclosed spaces that are on the drill - a Zone 2 space and a Zone 1 space.
floor and which are not separated by a
solid floor from the spaces in (iv). Where a sub access doors or other openings
are provided, any enclosed space not referred to
2.1.3 Hazardous areas of Zone 2 include: under 2.1.2 or 2.1.3 and having a direct access
to any Zone 1 location or Zone 2 location
i) Enclosed spaces which contain open becomes the same zone as the location except
sections of the mud circulating system that:
from the final degassing discharge to

Page 3 of 4
___________________________________________________________________________________
a) an enclosed space with direct access to any c) an enclosed space with direct access to any
Zone 1 location can be considered as Zone Zone 1 location is not considered hazardous
2 if: if:
i) the access is fitted with a self- i) the access is fitted with two gas-
closing gas-tight door opening into tight self-closing doors forming an
the Zone 2 space, and air lock, and
ii) ventilation is such that the air flow ii) the space has ventilation
with the door open is from the Zone overpressure in relation to the
2 space into the Zone 1 location, hazardous space, and
and
iii) loss of ventilation overpressure is
iii) loss of ventilation is alarmed at a alarmed at a manned station.
manned station;
2.2.2 Where ventilation arrangements of the
b) an enclosed space with direct access to any intended safe space are considered sufficient by
Zone 2 location is not considered hazardous IRS to prevent any ingress of gas from the Zone
if: 1 location, the two self-closing doors forming an
air lock may be replaced by a single self-closing
i) the access is fitted with a self- gas-tight door which opens into the non-
closing gas-tight door that opens hazardous location and has no hold-back
into the non-hazardous location, device.
and
2.2.3 Piping systems are to be designed to
ii) ventilation is such that the air flow preclude direct communication between
with the door open is from the non- hazardous areas of different classifications and
hazardous space into the Zone 2 between hazardous and non-hazardous areas.
locations, and
2.2.4 Hold-back devices are not to be used on
iii) loss of ventilation is alarmed at a self-closing gastight doors forming hazardous
manned station; area boundaries.
Section 3
Ventilation
3.1 General 3.2 Ventilation of hazardous areas
3.1.1 Attention is to be given to ventilation inlet 3.2.1 Enclosed hazardous spaces are to be
and outlet location and airflow in order to provided with adequate ventilation with under
minimize the possibility of cross contamination. pressure in relation to the less hazardous space
Inlets are to be located in non-hazardous areas or zone. Hazardous enclosed mud processing
as high and as far away from any hazardous spaces are to be ventilated at a minimum rate of
area as practicable. All air inlets for hazardous 12 air changes per hour. Where mechanical
enclosed spaces are to be located in non- ventilation is applied it is to be such that the
hazardous areas. Each air outlet is to be located hazardous enclosed spaces are maintained with
in an outdoor area which, in the absence of the underpressure in relation to the less hazardous
considered outlet, is of the same or lesser spaces or areas and non-hazardous enclosed
hazard than the ventilated space. Ventilation for spaces are maintained in overpressure in
hazardous areas is to be completely separate relation to adjacent hazardous locations.
from that used for non-hazardous areas. Where The arrangement of ventilation inlet and outlet
passing through hazardous areas of a higher openings in the space is to be such that the
level, the ventilation duct is to have entire space is efficiently ventilated, giving
overpressure in relation to this area; Where the special consideration to location of equipment
ventilation duct passes through a hazardous which may release gas, and to spaces where
area of a lower level, the ventilation duct is to gas may accumulate.
have underpressure in relation to this area.

Page 4 of 4
3.2.2 The outlet air from Zone 1 and Zone 2 underpressures are to be rigidly constructed to
spaces is to be led in separate ducts to outdoor avoid air leaks. Fans are to be designed so as to
locations. The internal spaces of such ducts reduce the risk that sparks may occur.
belong to the same Zone as the inlet space. Air
inlet ducts designed for constant relative
Section 4
Dangerous goods
4.1 Dangerous goods are to be stored safely
and appropriately according to the nature of the 4.3 Flammable liquids which give off dangerous
goods. Incompatible goods are to be segregated vapours and flammable gases are to be stored
from one another. in a well-ventilated space or on deck.
4.2 Explosives which present a serious risk are 4.4 Substances which are liable to spontaneous
to be stored in a suitable magazine which is to heating or combustion are not to be carried
be kept securely closed. Such explosives are to unless adequate precautions have been taken
be segregated from detonators. Electrical to prevent the outbreak of fire.
apparatus and cables in any compartment in
which it is intended to store explosives are to be 4.5 Radioactive substances are to be stored and
designed and used so as to minimize the risk of handled in a safe manner.
fire or explosion.
End Of Chapter

Page 1 of 16
___________________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 12
Machinery
Contents
Section
1 General
2 Piping Systems
3 Ballast Systems for Column Stabilized Drilling Units
4 Bilge System
5 Tank Vents, Overflows and Sounding Arrangement
6 Flammable Oils
7 Steam Pipe Systems
8 Air Pressure Systems
Section 1
General
1.1 Scope Classification of Steel Ships are also to be

complied with.
1.1.1 The following requirements apply to the The above machinery are to be of a design and
machinery essential to the safe operation of the construction adequate for the intended service
drilling unit. These requirements do not apply to and are to be so installed and protected as to
equipment and systems used solely for the reduce to a minimum any danger to persons on
drilling operation, except in so far as safety is board, due regard being paid to moving parts,
concerned. hot surfaces and other hazards. The design is to
have regard to materials used in construction,
1.1.2 Systems and equipment that are used and to the marine and industrial purposes for
solely for drilling and that may affect the safety which the equipment is intended, the working
of the drilling unit on which they are installed conditions and the environmental conditions to
may be designed to the alternative requirements which it will be subjected. Consideration is to be
of recognized standards acceptable to IRS. given to the consequences of the failure of
Codes and standards of practice which have systems and equipment essential to the safety
been proven to be effective by actual application of the unit.
by the offshore drilling industry which are not in
conflict with the Rules, and which are 1.1.4 When alternative design or arrangements
acceptable to IRS, may be applied in addition to deviate from the provisions of the Rules, an
these provisions. engineering analysis, evaluation and approval of
the design and arrangements is to be carried out
1.1.3 All propulsion and auxiliary machinery in accordance with MODU Code 2009 (IMO
including shafting and propellers, steering Resolution A1023(26)) Chapter 4, Sec.4.2.
arrangements, boilers and other pressure
vessels, control systems, jacking systems, 1.2 Machinery installations - Inclinations
pumping and piping systems necessary for the
safe operation of the drilling unit are to satisfy 1.2.1 For non-self-propelled drilling units
the requirements specified in this chapter.
Other applicable requirements for construction a) All machinery, components and systems
and installation in accordance with the Rules essential to the safe operation of a drilling
and Regulations for the Construction & unit are to be designed to operate under the
following static conditions of inclination:

Page 2 of 16
i) 25 in any direction on a column

i) when column stabilized drilling units stabilized drilling unit;
are upright and inclined to an angle
upto 15 in any direction: ii) 15 in any direction on a self-
elevating drilling unit; and
ii) when self-elevating drilling units are
upright and inclined to an angle upto iii) 22.5 about the longitudinal axis
10 in any direction: and/or when inclined 10 about the
transverse axis on surface drilling
iii) when surface drilling units are unit.
upright and level trim and when
inclined to an angle of list upto 15 1.3 Jacking systems
either way and simultaneously
trimmed to an angle upto 5 by the 1.3.1 The jacking system is to be designed and
bow or stern. constructed to maintain the safety of the drilling
unit in the event of failure of a critical component
b) IRS may permit or require deviations from during operation of the jacking system. Suitable
these angles, taking into consideration the monitoring is to be provided at a manned control
type, size and service conditions of the station to indicate such failure.
drilling unit.
1.3.2 Jacking mechanisms are to be:
1.2.2 For self-propelled drilling units
i. arranged so that a single failure of any
a) Main propulsion machinery and all auxiliary component does not cause an
machinery essential to the propulsion and uncontrolled descent of the unit;
the safety of the drilling unit are to be
capable of operating under the static ii. designed and constructed for the
conditions required by 1.2.1 and the maximum lowering and lifting loads of
following dynamic conditions: the unit as specified in the unit’s
operation manual in accordance with
i) in case of column stabilized type chapter 1.
drilling units, inclination upto 22.5 in
any direction; iii. able to withstand the forces imposed on
the unit from the maximum
ii) in case of self-elevating type drilling environmental criteria for the unit; and
units, inclination upto 15 in any
direction; iv. constructed such that the elevation of
the leg relative to the unit can be safely
iii) in case of surface type drilling units, maintained in case of loss of power
inclination upto 22.5 rolling and (e.g., electric, hydraulic, or pneumatic
simultaneously pitching 7.5 by bow power).
or stern.
1.3.3 The elevating system is to be operable
b) IRS may permit deviation from these angles, from a central jacking control station. The
taking into consideration the type, size and jacking control station is to have the following:
service conditions of the drilling unit.
.1 audible and visual alarms for jacking system
1.2.3 Emergency source of power on all drilling overload and out-of-level. Units whose jacking
units systems are subject to rack phase differential
are also to have audible and visual alarms for
a) The emergency generator and its prime rack phase differential; and
mover and any emergency accumulator
battery are to be capable of supplying the .2 instrumentation to indicate:
power required by Chapter 13, Sec.3 of
these Rules when upright and when inclined .2.1 the inclination of the unit on two horizontal
to the greater of the first intercept angles at perpendicular axes;
which compliance with the intact and
damage stability criteria of Ch. 5 are .2.2 power consumption or other indicators for
satisfied. However, in no case need the lifting or lowering the legs, as applicable; and
equipment be designed to operate when
inclined more than: .2.3 brake release status.

Page 3 of 16
___________________________________________________________________________________
.3 A communication system is to be provided 1.4.1.6 Where risk from overspeeding of
between the central jacking control and a machinery exists, means are to be provided to
location at each leg. ensure that the safe speed is not exceeded.
1.4 Machinery for non-self-propelled drilling 1.4.1.7 Exhaust outlets of internal combustion
units engines are to be fitted with efficient spark
arresting devices and are to discharge outside
1.4.1 Machinery arrangements the hazardous areas. Exhaust outlets of fired
boilers are to discharge outside hazardous
1.4.1.1 Adequate provisions and arrangements areas.
are to be made to facilitate safe access,
cleaning, inspection and maintenance of 1.4.1.8 Air intakes for internal combustion
machinery including boilers and pressure engines are not to be less than 3 [m] from the
vessels. hazardous areas.
1.4.1.2 All gearing, shafts and couplings used 1.4.1.9 All boilers, all parts of machinery, all
for transmission of power to machinery are to be steam, hydraulic, pneumatic and other systems
designed and constructed so that they will and their associated fittings which are under
withstand the maximum working stresses to internal pressure are to be subjected to
which they may be subjected in all service appropriate tests including a pressure test
conditions, taking into account the type of before being put into service for the first time.
engines by which they are driven or of which
they form part. 1.4.1.10 Where machinery including pressure
vessels or any parts of such machinery are
1.4.1.3 Machinery, where applicable, is to be subject to internal pressure and may be subject
provided with automatic shutoff arrangements or to dangerous overpressure, means are to be
alarms in the case of failures, such as provided where applicable, which will protect
lubricating oil supply failure, which could lead against such excessive pressure.
rapidly to complete breakdown, damage or
explosion. IRS may accept provisions for 1.4.1.11 Boilers and steam generators are to be
overriding automatic shutoff devices. fitted with not less than two safety valves, each
having a minimum internal diameter of 25 [mm],
1.4.1.4 As far as possible, fitting of internal but those having a total heating surface of less
combustion engines in hazardous areas is to be than 50 [m2] may have one valve not less than
avoided. When this cannot be avoided, special 50 [mm] diameter.
consideration may be given to the proposed
arrangement. 1.4.1.12 Every oil-fired boiler which is intended
to operate without manual supervision is to have
1.4.1.5 Internal combustion engines of a cylinder safety arrangements which shut off the fuel
diameter of 200 [mm] or a crankcase volume of supply and give an alarm at an attended location
0.6 [m3] and above are to be provided with in the case of low water level, air supply failure
crankcase explosion relief valves of an or flame failure.
approved type with sufficient relief area. The
relief valves are to be arranged or provided with 1.4.1.13 Every steam generating system which
means to ensure that discharge from them is could be rendered dangerous by the failure of its
directed so as to minimize the possibility of feedwater supply is to be provided with not less
injury to personnel. than two separate feedwater systems from and
Crankcase explosion relief valves are to be type including the feed pumps, noting that a single
tested in a configuration that represents the penetration of the steam drum is acceptable. For
installation arrangements that will be used on an those services not essential for the safety of the
engine, in accordance with IRS Classification unit, only one feedwater system is required if
Notes: “Guidance for Type Testing of Crankcase automatic shutdown of the steam generating
Explosion Relief Valves”. system upon loss of the feedwater supply is
provided. Means are to be provided which will
Internal combustion engines of 2,250 kW and prevent overpressure in any part of the
above or having cylinders of more than 300 feedwater system.
[mm] bore are to be provided with crankcase oil
mist detectors or engine bearing temperature 1.4.1.14 Boilers are to be provided with means
monitors or equivalent devices. to supervise and control the quality of the
feedwater. As far as practicable, means are to
be provided to preclude the entry of oil or other

Page 4 of 16
contaminants which may adversely affect the 1.5.1.2 Means are to be provided whereby
boiler. normal operation of propulsion machinery can
be sustained or restored even though one of the
1.4.1.15 Every boiler essential for the safety of essential auxiliaries becomes inoperative.
the unit and which is designed to have a water Special consideration is to be given to the
level is to be provided with at least two means malfunction of:
for indicating its water level, at least one of
which is to be a direct-reading gauge glass.
.1 a generator set which serves as a main
1.4.1.16 Fired boilers are not to be installed in source of electrical power;
hazardous areas.
.2 the sources of steam supply;
1.4.1.17 Means are to be provided to ensure
that machinery can be brought into operation .3 the arrangements for boiler feedwater;
from the “dead ship” condition without external
aid. .4 the arrangements which supply fuel oil for
boilers or engines;
1.4.1.18 Means are to be provided whereby
normal operation of vital systems, such as .5 the sources of lubricating oil pressure;
ballast systems in semisubmersible units,
jacking systems in self-elevating units and blow- .6 the sources of cooling water pressure;
out preventers, can be sustained or restored
even though one of the essential auxiliaries .7 a condensate pump and the arrangements to
becomes inoperable. maintain vacuum in condensers;
1.4.1.19 The control systems and indicators .8 the mechanical air supply for boilers;
required in 2.3.1 (b) of Ch 5 are to be operable
in both normal conditions and in the event of .9 an air compressor and receiver for starting or
main power failure. Where stored energy is control purposes; and
provided for this purpose, its capacity is to be to
the satisfaction of IRS. .10 the hydraulic, pneumatic or electrical means
for control in main propulsion machinery
1.4.2 Machinery controls including controllable-pitch propellers.
1.4.2.1 Machinery essential for the safety of the However, a partial reduction in capability from
unit is to be provided with effective means for its full normal operation may be accepted, having
operation and control. regard to overall safety considerations.
1.4.2.2 Automatic starting, operational and 1.5.1.3 Special consideration is to be given to

control systems for machinery essential for the the design, construction and installation of
safety of the unit are to, in general, include propulsion machinery systems so that any mode
provisions for manually overriding the automatic of their vibrations will not cause undue stresses
controls. Failure of any part of the automatic and in this machinery in the normal operating
remote control system is not to prevent the use ranges.
of the manual override. Visual indication is to be
provided to show whether or not the override 1.5.2 Means of going astern
has been actuated.
1.5.2.1 Units are to have sufficient power for
1.5 Machinery for self-propelled drilling units going astern to secure proper control of the unit
in all normal circumstances.
1.5.1 General
1.5.2.2 The ability of the machinery to reverse
1.5.1.1 The provisions of subsection 1.5 apply to the direction of thrust of the propeller in
units which are designed to undertake self- sufficient time and so to bring the unit to rest
propelled passages without external assistance within a reasonable distance from maximum
and are not applicable to units which are fitted ahead service speed is to be demonstrated.
only with means for the purpose of positioning or
of assistance in towing operations. These 1.5.2.3 The stopping times, unit headings and
provisions are additional to those in 1.4 and 1.7. distances recorded on trials, together with the
results of trials to determine the ability of units
having multiple propellers to navigate and
manoeuvre with one or more propellers

Page 5 of 16
___________________________________________________________________________________
inoperative, are to be available on board for the .3 the main propulsion machinery is to be
use of the master or other designated provided with an emergency stopping device on
personnel. (Refer to the IMO resolution the navigating bridge and independent from the
A.601(15) “Recommendation on the provision bridge control system;
and display of manoeuvring information on
board ships” ) .4 propulsion machinery orders from the
navigating bridge are to be indicated in the main
1.5.2.4 Where the unit is provided with machinery control station or at the manoeuvring
supplementary means for manoeuvring or platform as appropriate;
stopping, these are to be demonstrated and
recorded as referred to in 1.5.2.2 and 1.5.2.3. .5 remote control of the propulsion machinery is
to be possible from only one station at a time; at
1.5.3 Steam boilers and boiler feed systems one control station interconnected control units
are permitted. There is to be at each station an
1.5.3.1 Water tube boilers serving turbine indicator showing which station is in control of
propulsion machinery are to be fitted with a the propulsion machinery. The transfer of control
high-water-level alarm. between navigating bridge and machinery
spaces is to be possible only in the machinery
1.5.3.2 Every steam generating system which space or machinery control room;
provides services essential for the propulsion of
the unit is to be provided with not less than two The system is to include means to prevent the
separate feedwater systems from and including propelling thrust from altering significantly when
the feed pumps, noting that a single penetration transferring control from one location to another.
of the steam drum is acceptable. Means are to
be provided which will prevent overpressure in .6 it is to be possible to control the propulsion
any part of the systems. machinery locally, even in the case of failure in
any part of the automatic or remote control
1.5.4 Machinery controls system;
1.5.4.1 Main and auxiliary machinery essential .7 the design of the remote control system is to
for the propulsion of the unit are to be provided be such that in case of its failure an alarm will be
with effective means for its operation and given at the navigating bridge and at the main
control. All control systems essential for the machinery control station and the preset speed
propulsion, control and safety of the unit are to and direction of thrust is maintained until local
be independent or designed such that failure of control is in operation, unless it is considered
one system does not degrade the performance impracticable;
of another system. A pitch indicator is to be
provided on the navigating bridge for .8 indicators are to be fitted on the navigating
controllable-pitch propellers. bridge for:
1.5.4.2 Where remote control of propulsion .8.1 propeller speed and direction in case of
machinery from the navigating bridge is fixed-pitch propellers;
provided and the machinery spaces are
intended to be manned, the following are to .8.2 propeller speed and pitch position in case of
apply: controllable-pitch propellers;
.1 the speed, direction of thrust and, if .9 an alarm is to be provided at the navigating

applicable, the pitch of the propeller are to be bridge and in the machinery space to indicate
fully controllable from the navigating bridge low starting air pressure set at a level which still
under all sailing conditions, including permits main engine starting operations. If the
manoeuvring; remote control system of the propulsion
machinery is designed for automatic starting, the
.2 the remote control is to be performed, for number of automatic consecutive attempts
each independent propeller, by a control device which fail to produce a start are to be limited to
so designed and constructed that its operation safeguard sufficient starting air pressure for
does not require particular attention to the starting locally; and
operational details of the machinery. Where
more than one propeller is designed to operate .10 automation systems are to be designed in a
simultaneously, these propellers may be manner which ensures a threshold warning of
controlled by one control device; impending or imminent slowdown or shutdown
of the propulsion system is given to the officer in
charge of the navigational watch in time to

Page 6 of 16
assess navigational circumstances in an

emergency. In particular, the systems are to 1.5.5.5 The main steering gear power unit or
control, monitor, report, alert and take safety units are to be arranged to start automatically
action to slow down or stop propulsion while when power is restored after a power failure.
providing the officer in charge of the navigational
watch an opportunity to manually intervene, 1.5.5.6 The auxiliary steering gear is to be of
except for those cases where manual adequate strength and sufficient to steer the unit
intervention will result in total failure of the at navigable speed and capable of being
engine and/or propulsion equipment within a brought speedily into action in an emergency.
short time, for example in the case of
overspeed. 1.5.5.7 The auxiliary steering gear is to be
capable of putting the rudder over from 15° on
1.5.4.3 Where the main propulsion and one side to 15° on the other side in not more
associated machinery including sources of main than 60 [s] with the unit at its deepest seagoing
electrical supply are provided with various draught while running at one half of its maximum
degrees of automatic or remote control and are speed ahead or seven knots, whichever is the
under continuous manned supervision from a greater.
control room, this control room is to be
designed, equipped and installed so that the 1.5.5.8 The auxiliary steering gear is to be
machinery operation will be as safe and operated by power where necessary to fulfill the
effective as if it were under direct supervision; provisions of 1.5.5.7, and in any case in which a
for this purpose sections 1.6.3 to 1.6.5, 4.10, rudder stock of over 230 [mm] diameter is
Chapter 14 sections 5.1.2, 6.5 and 7.8 are to required in way of the tiller.
apply as appropriate. Particular consideration is
to be given to protection against fire and 1.5.5.9 Where the main steering gear comprises
flooding. two or more identical power units an auxiliary
steering gear need not be fitted if the main
1.5.5 Steering steering gear is capable of operating the rudder
in accordance with the provisions of 1.5.5.3
1.5.5.1 Except as provided in 1.5.5.18, units are while operating with all power units. As far as is
to be provided with a main steering gear and an reasonable and practicable the main steering
auxiliary steering gear to the satisfaction of IRS. gear is to be so arranged that a single failure in
The main steering gear and the auxiliary its piping or in one of the power units will not
steering gear are to be so arranged that a single impair the integrity of the remaining part of the
failure in one of them, so far as is reasonable steering gear.
and practicable, will not render the other one
inoperative. 1.5.5.10 Control of the main steering gear is to
be provided both on the navigating bridge and in
1.5.5.2 The main steering gear is to be of the steering gear compartment. If the steering
adequate strength and sufficient to steer the unit gear control system which provides for control
at maximum service speed and this is to be from the navigating bridge is electric, it is to be
demonstrated. The main steering gear and supplied from the steering gear power circuit
rudder stock are to be so designed that they will from a point within the steering gear
not be damaged at maximum astern speed but compartment.
this design requirement need not be proved by
trials at maximum astern speed and maximum 1.5.5.11 When the main steering gear is
rudder angle. arranged according to 1.5.5.9 two independent
control systems are to be provided, each of
1.5.5.3 The main steering gear is to, with the which can be operated from the navigating
unit at its deepest seagoing draught, be capable bridge. Where the control system comprises a
of putting the rudder over from 35° on one side hydraulic telemotor, waiver of the provisions for
to 35° on the other side with the unit running a second independent control system may be
ahead at maximum service speed. The rudder is considered.
to be capable of being put over from 35° on
either side to 30° on the other side in not more 1.5.5.12 Where the auxiliary steering gear is
than 28 [s], under the same conditions. power operated, it is to be provided with a
control system operated from the navigating
1.5.5.4 The main steering gear is to be operated bridge and this is to be independent of the
by power where necessary to fulfill the control system for the main steering gear.
provisions of 1.5.5.3 and in any case in which a
rudder stock of over 120 [mm] diameter is 1.5.5.13 Means are to be provided in the
required in way of the tiller. steering gear compartment to disconnect the

Page 7 of 16
___________________________________________________________________________________
steering gear control system from the power electric or electrohydraulic steering gear are to
circuit. have adequate rating for supplying all motors
which can be simultaneously connected to it and
1.5.5.14 A means of communication is to be have to operate simultaneously.
provided between the navigating bridge and:
1.5.6.3 Short-circuit protection and an overload
.1 the steering gear compartment; and alarm are to be provided for these circuits and
motors. Protection against excess current, if
.2 the emergency steering position, if provided. provided, is to be for not less than twice the full
load current of the motor or circuit so protected,
1.5.5.15 The exact angular position of the and is to be arranged to permit the passage of
rudder, if power operated, is to be indicated on the appropriate starting currents. Where a three-
the navigating bridge. The rudder angle phase supply is used, an alarm is to be provided
indication is to be independent of the steering that will indicate failure of any one of the supply
gear control system. phases. The alarms required above are to be
both audible and visual and be situated in a
1.5.5.16 The angular position of the rudder is to position on the navigating bridge where they can
be recognizable in the steering gear be readily observed.
compartment.
1.5.7 Communication between the navigating
1.5.5.17 An alternative power supply, sufficient bridge and the engine-room
at least to supply a steering gear power unit
which complies with the provisions of 1.5.5.7 Units are to be provided with at least two
and also its associated control system and the independent means for communicating orders
rudder angle indicator, is to be provided, from the navigating bridge to the position in the
automatically, within 45 [s], upon failure of main machinery space or control room from which the
power supply, either from the emergency source engines are normally controlled, one of which is
of electrical power or from another independent to provide visual indication of the orders and
source of power located in the steering gear responses both in the engine-room and on the
compartment. This independent source of power navigating bridge. Consideration will be given to
is to be used only for this purpose and is to have providing a means of communication to any
a capacity sufficient for 10 min of continuous other positions from which the engines may be
operation. controlled.
1.5.5.18 Where a non-conventional rudder is 1.5.8 Engineers’ alarm

installed, or where a unit is steered by means
other than a rudder, special consideration may An engineers’ alarm is to be provided to be
be given to the steering system so as to ensure operated from the engine control room or at the
that an acceptable degree of reliability and manoeuvring platform, as appropriate, and
effectiveness, which is based on 1.5.5.1, is clearly audible in the engineers’
provided (Also refer Pt. 4, Ch. 6, 2.2 of the accommodation.
Rules and Regulations for Construction and
Classification of Steel Ships). 1.6 Periodically unattended machinery
spaces for all types of units
1.5.6 Electric and electrohydraulic steering
gear 1.6.1 General
1.5.6.1 Indicators for running of the motors of The provisions of 1.6, 4.10 and Chapter 14 are
electric and electrohydraulic steering gear are to additional to those of 1.4 and 1.5 and apply to
be installed on the navigating bridge and at a periodically unattended machinery spaces
suitable machinery control position. specified herein. The arrangements are to
ensure that the safety of the unit in the marine
1.5.6.2 Each electric or electrohydraulic steering mode, including manoeuvring, and in machinery
gear comprising one or more power units is to spaces of category A during drilling operations,
be served by at least two circuits fed from the where applicable, is equivalent to that of a unit
main switchboard. One of the circuits may pass having manned machinery spaces.
through the emergency switchboard. An
auxiliary electric or electrohydraulic steering 1.6.2 Application
gear associated with a main electric or
electrohydraulic steering gear may be 1.6.2.1 The provisions of sections 1.6.3 to 1.6.8,
connected to one of the circuits supplying this 4.10, Chapter 14 sections 5.1.2, 6.5 and 7.8
main steering gear. The circuits supplying an apply to units which are designed to undertake

Page 8 of 16
self-propelled passages without external 1.6.3.4 Means are to be provided in case of fire:
assistance.
.1 in boiler air supply casings and exhausts
1.6.2.2 Units other than those designed for (uptakes); and
unassisted passages, having periodically
unattended spaces in which machinery .2 in scavenging air belts of propulsion
associated with the marine mode is located, are machinery,
to comply with the applicable parts of sections
1.6.3, 1.6.6, 1.6.7, 1.6.8, 4.10, Chapter 14 to detect fires and give alarms at an early
sections 5.1.2, 6.5 and 7.8. stage, unless it is considered unnecessary in a
particular case by IRS.
1.6.2.3 Where in any unit, machinery spaces of
category A for drilling purposes are intended to 1.6.4 Bridge control of propulsion machinery
be periodically unattended, sections 1.6.3, 1.6.8,
Chapter 14 sections 5.1.2, 6.5 and 7.8 would be 1.6.4.1 Remote control of propellers from the
applied to machinery spaces of category A, due navigating bridge should also ensure automatic
consideration being given to the characteristics performance of all associated services,
of the machinery concerned and to the including, where necessary, means of
supervision envisaged to ensure safety. preventing overload of the propulsion
machinery.
1.6.2.4 Measures are to be taken to the
satisfaction of IRS to ensure that the equipment 1.6.5 Communication
of every unit is functioning in a reliable manner
and that satisfactory arrangements are made for A reliable means of vocal communication is to
regular inspections and routine tests to ensure be provided between the main machinery
continuous reliable operation. control station or the propulsion machinery
control position as appropriate, the navigating
1.6.2.5 Every unit is to be provided with bridge, the engineer officers’ accommodation
documentary evidence, to the satisfaction of and, on column-stabilized units, the central
IRS, of its fitness to operate with periodically ballast control station.
unattended machinery spaces.
1.6.6 Alarm system
1.6.3 Fire prevention
1.6.6.1 An alarm system is to be provided in the
1.6.3.1 Where necessary, oil fuel and lubricating main machinery control station giving audible
oil pipes are to be screened or otherwise and visual indication of any fault requiring
suitably protected to avoid, as far as practicable, attention. It is to also:
oil spray or oil leakages on to hot surfaces or
into machinery air intakes. The number of joints .1 activate an audible and visual alarm at
in such piping systems are to be kept to a another normally manned control station;
minimum and, where practicable, leakages from
high-pressure oil fuel pipes are to be collected .2 activate the engineers’ alarm provided in
and arrangements provided for an alarm to be accordance with section 1.5.8, or an equivalent
given. alarm acceptable to IRS, if an alarm function
has not received attention locally within a limited
1.6.3.2 Where daily service oil fuel tanks are time;
filled automatically, or by remote control, means
are to be provided to prevent overflow spillages. .3 as far as is practicable be designed on the
Other equipment which treats flammable liquids fail-to-safety principle; and
automatically, e.g., oil fuel purifiers, which,
whenever practicable, are to be installed in a .4 when in the marine mode, activate an audible
special space reserved for purifiers and their and visual alarm on the navigating bridge for
heaters, are to have arrangements to prevent any situation which requires action by the officer
overflow spillages. on watch or which is to be brought to the
attention of the officer on watch.
1.6.3.3 Where daily service oil fuel tanks or
settling tanks are fitted with heating 1.6.6.2 The alarm system is to be continuously
arrangements, a high-temperature alarm is to be powered and is to have an automatic change-
provided if the flashpoint of the oil fuel can be over to a stand-by power supply in case of loss
exceeded. of normal power supply.

Page 9 of 16
___________________________________________________________________________________
1.6.6.3 Alarm is to be provided for failure of the given at the locations determined in accordance
normal power supply of the alarm system. with 1.6.6.1. Shutdown of the propulsion system
is not to be automatically activated except in
1.6.6.4 The alarm system is to be able to cases which could lead to serious damage,
indicate at the same time more than one fault complete breakdown, or explosion. Where
and the acceptance of any alarm is to not inhibit arrangements for overriding the shutdown of the
another alarm. main propelling machinery are fitted, these are
to be such as to preclude inadvertent operation.
1.6.6.5 Acceptance at the position mentioned in Visual means are to be provided to indicate
1.6.6.1 of any alarm condition is to be indicated when the override has been activated.
at the positions where it has been shown.
Alarms are to be maintained until they are 1.7 Machinery installations in hazardous
accepted and the visual indications are to areas
remain until the fault has been corrected, when
the alarm system is to automatically reset to the 1.7.1 Mechanical equipment is to be limited to
normal operating condition. that necessary for operational purposes.
1.6.7 Special provisions for machinery, boiler 1.7.2 Mechanical equipment and machinery in
and electrical installations hazardous areas are to be so constructed and
installed as to reduce the risk of ignition from
1.6.7.1 The special provisions for the machinery, sparking due to the formation of static electricity
boiler and electrical installations are to be to the or friction between moving parts and from high
satisfaction of IRS and are to include at least the temperatures of exposed parts due to exhausts
requirements of this section. or other emissions (Refer Ch. 11 for Zone
classification of Hazardous Areas)
1.6.7.2 Change-over function:
1.7.3 The installation of internal combustion
Where stand-by machines are required for other machinery may be permitted in zone 1 and zone
auxiliary machinery essential to propulsion, 2 hazardous areas, provided IRS is satisfied that
automatic change-over devices are to be sufficient precautions have been taken against
provided. An alarm is to be activated on the risk of dangerous ignition(Refer “ASTM
automatic change-over. F2876-10 Standard Practice for Thermal Rating
and Installation of Internal Combustion Engines
1.6.7.3 Automatic control and alarm systems: Packages for use in Hazardous Locations in
Marine Applications”).
.1 The control systems are to be such that the
services needed for the operation of the main 1.7.4 The installation of fired equipment may be
propulsion machinery and its auxiliaries are permitted in zone 2 hazardous areas, provided
ensured through the necessary automatic that IRS is satisfied that sufficient precaution
arrangements. has been taken against the risk of dangerous
ignition.
.2 Means are to be provided to keep the starting
air pressure at the required level where internal 1.8 Diving systems
combustion engines are used for main
propulsion. 1.8.1 Diving systems, if provided, are to be
installed, protected and maintained so as to
.3 An alarm system complying with section 1.6.6 minimize, so far as practicable, any danger to
is to be provided for all important pressures, personnel or the unit, due regard being paid to
temperatures and fluid levels and other essential fire, explosion or other hazards.
parameters.
1.8.2 Diving systems are to be designed,
1.6.8 Safety systems constructed, maintained and certified in
accordance with a national or international
A safety system is to be provided to ensure that standard or code acceptable to IRS, which may
serious malfunction in machinery or boiler be employed for fixed diving systems, if
operations, which presents an immediate provided.
danger, is to initiate the automatic shutdown of
that part of the plant and that an alarm is to be

Page 10 of 16
Section 2
Piping Systems
2.1 General operated, a secondary means of operating the

valves which may be manual control, is to be
2.1.1 Pipes are to be arranged inboard of the provided.
zone of assumed damage penetration unless
special consideration has been taken in the 2.2.2 Remote operation of sea-water inlet and
damage stability review. discharge valves -
2.1.2 Piping systems carrying non-hazardous a) Inlet and discharge valves in compartments
fluids are generally to be separate from piping situated below the assigned load line
systems which may contain hazardous fluids. (normally unattended compartments) are to
Cross connection of the piping systems may be be provided with remote controlled valves
permitted where means for avoiding possible operable from an accessible position
contamination of the non-hazardous fluid system outside the space. Where remote operation
by the hazardous medium are provided. is provided by power actuated valves for
sea-water inlets and discharges for
2.1.3 Where air or steam is used to atomize well operation of propulsion and power
bore fluids prior to flaring, a non-return valve is generating machinery, power supply failure
to be fitted in the air or steam line. This valve is of the control system is not to result in:
to be part of the permanently installed piping,
readily accessible and as close as possible to i) closing of open valves
the burner boom. Alternative arrangements
shown to provide an equivalent level of safety ii) opening of closed valves.
may be accepted by IRS.
b) Consideration will be given to accepting
2.2 Valve arrangements bilge alarms in lieu of remote operation for
surface type and self-elevating drilling units
2.2.1 Where valves of piping systems are only.
arranged for remote control and are power
Section 3
Ballast Systems for Column Stabilized Drilling Units
3.1 General tanks, taking into account effects of corrosion or

other deterioration.
3.1.1 Each ballast tank is to be capable of being
pumped out by at least two independent power- 3.2 Capacity
driven pumps so that the system remains
operational in the event of failure of any one 3.2.1 The system is to be capable of raising the
such pump and arranged so that tanks can be drilling unit, while in an intact condition, starting
drained at all normal operating and transit from a level trim condition at deepest normal
conditions. Alternatively, controlled gravity operating draft, to the severe storm draft, or a
ballasting may be accepted by IRS. greater distance as may be specified by IRS,
The ballast pumps are to be of the self-priming within three hours.
type or be provided with a separate priming
system. The pumps provided need not be 3.3 System arrangement
dedicated ballast pumps, but are to be readily
available for such use at all times. 3.3.1 The ballast system is to be arranged and
operated so as to prevent the inadvertent
3.1.2 All ballast pipes are to be of steel or other transfer of ballast water from one tank or hull to
suitable material having properties acceptable to another of the drilling unit, which could result in
IRS. Special consideration is to be given to the moment shifts leading to excessive angles of
design of ballast lines passing through ballast heel or trim. The system is also to be arranged

Page 11 of 16
___________________________________________________________________________________
so that the transfer of ballast water from one and any back-up stations are to be readily
tank to any other tank through a single valve is accessible, located above the worst damage
not possible except where such a transfer would waterline and protected from the weather when
not adversely affect the stability of the drilling the drilling unit is subject to the assumed
unit. conditions of severe storm and damage.
Additionally, these stations are not to be located
3.3.2 Air pipes are to be provided on each within the assumed damaged penetration zone.
ballast tank sufficient in number and cross- The central ballast control station is to include
sectional area to permit the efficient operation of the following control and indicating systems,
the ballast pumping system under the conditions having appropriate audible and visual alarms,
referred to in this section. where applicable:
In the case of all tanks which can be pumped up ballast pump control system;
either by ship's pumps or by shore pumps
through a filling main, the total crosssectional ballast pump suction and discharge
area of the vent pipes to each tank, or of the pressure;
overflow pipes where an overflow system is
provided, is to be not less than 25 per cent ballast pump status-indicating system;
greater than the effective area of the respective
filling pipes. Where tanks are fitted with cross ballast valve control system;
flooding connections, the vent pipes are to be of
adequate area for these connections. Vent pipes A valve position indicating system. All
are not to be less than 50 [mm] bore. valves and operating controls are to be
clearly marked to identify the function they
In order to allow deballasting of the ballast tanks serve. Means is to be provided locally to
intended to be used to bring the unit back to indicate whether a valve is open or closed.
normal draught and to ensure no inclination after
damage, air pipe openings for these tanks are to A tank level indicating system.
be above the worst damage waterline specified
in chapter 5. Such air pipes are to be positioned A draft indicating system.
outside the extent of damage, as defined in
chapter 5. heel and trim indicators;
3.4 Operation in damaged condition power availability indicating system (main

and emergency);
3.4.1 The ballast system is to be arranged so
that even with any one pump inoperable, the ballast control system hydraulic/pneumatic
remaining pumps are capable of restoring the pressure-indicating system.
drilling unit to a level trim condition and draft
acceptable to IRS with respect to stability, where A permanently installed means of
necessary without taking on additional ballast, communication independent of the unit’s
when subject to the damage conditions specified main source of electrical power, between
in Ch. 4 5. IRS may accept counter-flooding as the central ballast control station and those
an operational procedure. Counter-flooding is spaces containing the alternative means of
not to be considered as a means to improve the control for the ballast pumps and valves or
suction head available to the ballast pumps other spaces that may contain equipment
when considering the operability of the ballast necessary for the operation of the ballast
system after the damage specified in Chapter 5. system.
3.5 Control features The tank level indicating system listed above is
to provide means to:
3.5.1 Ballast pumps, ballast tank valves and sea
chest valves are to be provided with a means of .1 indicate liquid levels in all ballast tanks. A
remote control from a central ballast control secondary means of determining levels in
station. Pumps are also to be provided with a ballast tanks, which may be a sounding pipe, is
means of local control in the pump room to be provided. Tank level sensors are not to be
operable in the event of remote control failure. A situated in the tank suction lines;
manually operated independent means of
control of the valves is also to be provided. The .2 indicate liquid levels in other tanks, such as
independent local control of each ballast pump fuel oil, fresh water, drilling water or liquid
and of its associated ballast tank valves is to be storage tanks, the filling or emptying of which, in
in the same location. This ballast control station the view of IRS, could affect the stability of the

Page 12 of 16
unit. Tank level sensors are not to be situated in 3.5.2 The control and indicating systems are to
the tank suction lines. function independently of each other so that a
failure in any one system will not affect the
The draught indicating system is to display the operation of the other systems. The ballast
draught as measured at each corner of the unit pump and ballast valve control systems are to
or at representative positions as required by be arranged so that the loss of any one of their
IRS. components will not cause the loss of operation
to the other pumps or valves.
Enclosures housing ballast system electrical
components, the failure of which would cause 3.5.3 To ensure that uncontrolled transfer of
unsafe operation of the ballast system upon ballast water will not continue upon loss of
liquid entry into the enclosure, are to comply power, ballast tank valves are to close
with Ch. 13, 5.21. automatically upon loss of power or be provided
with an arrangement considered equivalent to
A means to indicate whether a valve is open or the satisfaction of IRS. Upon reactivation of
closed is to be provided at each location from control power, each such valve is to remain
which the valve can be controlled. The closed until the ballast control operator assumes
indicators are to rely on movement of the valve control of the reactivated system.
spindle, or be otherwise arranged with
equivalent reliability. 3.5.4 It is to be possible to supply each ballast
pump provided to meet 3.1.1 from the
Means are to be provided at the central ballast emergency source of power. The arrangements
control station to isolate or disconnect the are to be such that the system is capable of
ballast pump control and ballast valve control restoring the unit from an inclination specified in
systems from their sources of electrical, 1.2.1 to a level trim and safe draught condition
pneumatic or hydraulic power. after loss of any single component in the power
supply system.
Section 4
Bilge System
4.1 General suction may be drained to other spaces

provided with bilge pumping capability. Means is
4.1.1 In general, the bilge system is to be in to be provided to detect the presence of water in
accordance with the Rules and Regulations for such compartments which are adjacent to the
the Construction & Classification of Steel Ships, sea or adjacent to tanks containing liquids and
Pt. 4, Ch. 3. An efficient bilge pumping system is in void compartments through which pipes
to be provided, capable of pumping from and conveying liquids pass. If IRS is satisfied that
draining watertight compartments other than the safety of the unit is not impaired the bilge
spaces permanently appropriated for the pumping arrangements and the means to detect
carriage of fresh water, water ballast, oil fuel or the presence of water may be dispensed with in
liquid cargo and for which other efficient means particular compartments.
of pumping are provided, under all practical
conditions whether the unit is upright or inclined, All bilge pipes are to be of steel or other suitable
as specified in 1.2.1. These compartments are material having properties acceptable to IRS.
to be drained with at least two self-priming Special consideration is to be given to the
power bilge pumps, or equivalent means. design of bilge lines passing through ballast
Sanitary, ballast and general service pumps tanks taking into account effects of corrosion or
may be accepted as independent power bilge other deterioration.
pumps if fitted with the necessary connections to
the bilge pumping system. The arrangement of the bilge pumping system is
to be such as to prevent the possibility of water
Additional suctions are to be provided in large passing from the sea into dry spaces, or
compartments or compartments of unusual inadvertently from one compartment to another.
form, as deemed necessary by IRS.
Arrangements are to be made whereby water in 4.1.2 All distribution boxes and manually
the compartment may find its way to the suction operated valves in connection with the bilge
pipes. Compartments not provided with a bilge pumping arrangements are to be in positions

Page 13 of 16
___________________________________________________________________________________
which are accessible under normal compartments as defined above which are not
circumstances. Where such valves are located provided with bilge or drainage systems in
in normally unmanned spaces below the compliance with the above are to be accounted
assigned load line and not provided with high for in the drilling unit's stability analysis.
bilge water level alarms, they are to be operable
from outside the space. A means to indicate 4.7 Bilge alarm
whether a valve is open or closed is to be
provided at each location from which the valve 4.7.1 Propulsion rooms or pump rooms in lower
can be controlled. The indicator is to rely on hulls of column stabilized drilling units which
movement of the valve spindle. normally are unattended are to be provided with
two independent systems of high bilge level
4.2 Size of bilge main detection.
4.2.1 The cross-sectional area of the main bilge 4.8 Bilge suctions from hazardous areas
line is not to be less than the combined areas of
the two largest branch suctions. 4.8.1 Piping systems are to be designed to
preclude direct communication between
4.3 Size of bilge branch suctions hazardous areas of different classifications and
between hazardous and non-hazardous areas.
4.3.1 The internal diameter of branch suctions
from each compartment is not to be less than 4.9 Additional requirements for column
stipulated by the following formula, rounded to stabilized drilling units
the nearest 5 [mm] size:
4.9.1 Chain lockers which, if flooded, could
d = 2.15 A + 25 mm substantially affect the drilling unit's stability are
to be provided with a remote means to detect
where flooding and a permanently installed means of
dewatering. Remote indication of flooding is to
A is wetted surface [m2] of the be provided at the central ballast control station.
compartment, excluding stiffening
members when the compartment is half 4.9.2 At least one of the pumps referred to in
filled with water. The internal diameter 4.1.1 and all pump-room bilge suction valves are
of any bilge line is not to be less than 50 to be capable of both remote and local
mm. operation.
4.4 Size of bilge pumps 4.9.3 Propulsion rooms and pump-rooms in

lower hulls are to be provided with two
4.4.1 Each bilge pump is to be capable of giving independent systems for high bilge water level
a speed of water through the bilge main of not detection providing an audible and visual alarm
less than 2 [m] per second. When more than two at the central ballast control station.
pumps are connected to the bilge system, their
aggregate capacity is not to be less effective. 4.10 Additional requirements for periodically
4.5 Chainlockers
4.10.1 High bilge-water level in periodically
4.5.1 Chainlockers are to be capable of being unattended machinery spaces below the
drained by a permanently installed bilge or assigned load line is to activate an audible and
drainage system or by portable means. Means visual alarm at the locations determined in
are to be provided for removal of mud and accordance with 1.6.6.1.
debris from the bilge or drainage system.
4.10.2 Bilge wells are to be provided, where
4.6 Void compartments practicable, in periodically unattended
machinery spaces and are to be large enough to
4.6.1 Void compartments adjacent to the sea or accommodate easily the normal drainage during
to tanks containing liquids, and void unattended periods. They are to be located and
compartments through which piping conveying monitored in such a way that the accumulation
liquids passes, are to be capable of being of liquids is detected at pre-set levels, at normal
drained by permanently installed bilge or angles of inclination.
drainage systems or by portable means. If
portable pumps are used, two pumps are to be 4.10.3 Where the bilge pumps are capable of
provided and both pumps and arrangements for being started automatically, means are to be
pumping are to be readily accessible. Void provided to indicate at the locations determined

Page 14 of 16
in accordance with 1.6.6.1 when the influx of

liquid is greater than the pump capacity or when
the pump is operating more frequently than
would normally be expected. In these cases,
smaller bilge wells to cover a reasonable period
of time may be permitted. Where automatically
controlled bilge pumps are provided, special
attention is to be given to oil pollution prevention
requirements.
Section 5
Tank Vents, Overflows and Sounding Arrangements
5.1 General 5.2 Vent size
5.1.1 Tank vents and overflows are to be 5.2.1 The size of the vents is to be in
located giving due regard to damage stability accordance with the Rules and Regulations for
and the location of the final calculated the Construction & Classification of Steel Ships
immersion line in the assumed damage with due consideration being given to the design
condition. Tank vents and overflows which could pressure of the tank.
cause progressive flooding are to be avoided
unless special consideration has been taken in 5.3 Sounding arrangements
the damage stability review. Location and
arrangement of vent pipes for fuel oil service, 5.3.1 All tanks are to be provided with separate
settling and lubrication oil tanks are to be such sounding pipes, or approved remote level
that, in the event of a broken vent pipe, the risk indicating system. Where a sounding pipe
of ingress of rainwater or seawater is minimized. exceeds 20 [m] in length, the minimum internal
diameter is to be to at least 50 [mm].
5.1.2 In cases where tank vents and overflows
terminate externally or in spaces assumed 5.3.2 Where a remote level indicating system is
flooded, the vented tanks are to be also used, an additional sounding system is to be
considered flooded. In cases where tanks are provided for tanks which are not always
considered damaged, the spaces in which their accessible.
vents or overflows terminate are also to be
considered flooded. 5.3.3 Void compartments adjacent to the sea or
tanks containing liquids and void compartments
5.1.3 Vents and overflows from tanks not through which piping carrying liquids passes are
considered flooded as a result of damage and to be fitted with separate sounding pipes,
located above the final calculated immersion line approved tank liquid level indicating apparatus
may require to be fitted with automatic means of or be fitted with means to determine if the void
closing. tanks contain liquids. Voids as defined above
which do not comply with this requirement are to
be accounted for in the drilling unit's stability
analysis.

Page 15 of 16
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 6
Flammable Oils
6.1 General employed under pressure in power transmission

systems, control and activating systems and
6.1.1 Use of oil fuels of a flash point below 60C heat transfer systems are to be such as to
but not less than 43C, closed cup test, may be ensure the safety of the unit and persons on
accepted in the following cases : board.
 Drilling units classed for restrictive service 6.3.2 In machinery spaces pipes, fittings and
within areas where the ambient temperature valves carrying flammable oils are to be of a
of spaces, where such fuel is stored, will not material approved by IRS, having regard to the
rise to within 10C of the flash point of the oil risk of fire.
fuel; and
6.3.3 Two fuel oil service tanks for each type of
 For emergency generators. fuel used on board necessary for propulsion and
vital systems or equivalent arrangements are to
6.1.2 Units carrying oil fuel, as defined in be provided, each with a capacity of at least
regulation 1 of Annex I of the International eight hours at the maximum continuous rating of
Convention for the Prevention of Pollution from the propulsion plant, if any, and normal
Ships, 1973, as modified by the Protocol of 1978 operating load of the generator plant.
relating thereto, are to be provided with material
safety data sheets, based on the IMO resolution 6.3.4 High pressure fuel delivery lines
MSC 286(86), prior to the bunkering of oil fuel.
.1 All external high pressure fuel delivery lines
6.2 Fuel storage for helicopter facilities between the high pressure fuel pumps and fuel
injectors are to be protected with a jacketed
6.2.1 Areas where such fuel tanks are situated piping system capable of containing fuel from a
and fueling operations conducted are to be high pressure line failure. A jacketed pipe
suitably isolated from enclosed spaces or other incorporates an outer pipe into which the high
areas which contain a source of vapour ignition. pressure fuel pipe is placed forming a
Fuel storage tanks are to be of approved permanent assembly. The jacketed piping
metallic construction and are to be adequate for system is to include a means for collection of
the installation. Special attention is to be given leakages and arrangements are to be provided
to the design, mounting and securing for an alarm to be given of a fuel line failure.
arrangements and electrical bonding of the tank
and fuel transfer system. The storage and .2 All surfaces with temperatures above 220°C,
handling area is to be permanently marked. which may be impinged as a result of a fuel
Coamings or other arrangements are to be system failure, are to be properly insulated.
provided to contain fuel-oil spills.
.3 Oil fuel lines are to be screened or otherwise
6.3 Arrangements for oil fuel, lubricating oil suitably protected to avoid, as far as practicable,
and other flammable oils oil spray or oil leakages onto hot surfaces, into
machinery air intakes, or other sources of
6.3.1 Arrangements for the storage, distribution ignition. The number of joints in such piping
and utilization of oil fuel, oil used in pressure systems are to be kept to a minimum.
lubrication systems, other flammable oils

Page 16 of 16
Section 7
Steam pipe systems
7.1 General 7.1.2 Efficient means are to be provided for

draining every steam pipe where dangerous
7.1.1 Every steam pipe and every fitting water hammer action might otherwise occur.
connected thereto through which steam may
pass is to be so designed, constructed and 7.1.3 If a steam pipe or fitting may receive
installed as to withstand the maximum working steam from any source at a higher pressure
stresses to which it may be subjected. than that for which it is designed, a suitable
reducing valve, relief valve and pressure gauge
are to be fitted.
Section 8
Air pressure systems

8.1 General 8.2 Starting air systems
8.1.1 In every unit means are to be provided to 8.2.1 The starting air arrangements for internal
prevent excess pressure in any part of combustion engines are to be adequately
compressed air systems and where water protected against the effects of backfiring and
jackets or casings of air compressors and internal explosions in the starting air pipes.
coolers might be subjected to dangerous excess
pressure due to leakage into them from air 8.2.2 Starting air pipes from the air receivers to
pressure parts. Suitable pressure-relief internal combustion engines are to be entirely
arrangements are to be provided for all systems. separate from the compressor discharge pipe
system.
8.2.3 Provision is to be made to reduce to a

minimum the entry of oil into the starting air
pressure systems and to drain these systems.
End Of Chapter

Page 1 of 12
___________________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 13
Electrical Installations
Contents
Section
1 General
2 Cables and Electrical Equipment in Hazardous Area
3 Main Source of Power
4 Emergency Source of Power
5 Precautions against Shock, Fire and other Hazards of Electrical Origin
6 Emergency Shutdown Facilities
7 Alarms and Internal Communication
Section 1
General
1.1 Scope ii) Navigation and special purpose lights,

lights for all machinery spaces, control
1.1.1 The following requirements apply to stations, alleyways, stairway and exits.
electrical equipment essential to the safe
operation of the drilling unit. These requirements iii) Fire pumps.
do not apply to electrical equipment and
systems used solely for the drilling operation iv) Propulsion equipment.
except in so far as safety is concerned. Attention
is, however, to be given to any relevant statutory v) Power generation equipment.
regulation of the National Authority of the
country in which the drilling unit is to be vi) Bilge pumps.
registered.
vii) Ballast pumps for column stabilized
1.2 Design and construction drilling units.
1.2.1 Electrical propelling machinery and 1.2.2 The design and installation of other
associated equipment together with auxiliary equipment including that used for drilling
services essential for the safety of the drilling operations is to be such that there is minimal
unit are to be constructed and installed in risk of fire due to its failure. It must, as a
accordance with the relevant requirements of minimum, comply with an acceptable
the Rules and Regulations for the Construction specification, standard or code, revised where
& Classification of Steel Ships and as specified necessary, for the ambient conditions.
herein.
1.2.3 For lighting in hazardous areas or spaces,
The following equipment is regarded as switches are to be of the two-pole type and
essential: wherever practicable located in a non-
hazardous area.
i) Ventilation of hazardous areas and
those areas maintained at an 1.2.4 Electrical installations are to be such that:
overpressure to exclude the ingress of
dangerous gases. .1 all electrical services necessary for
maintaining the unit in normal operational and

Page 2 of 12
habitable conditions will be assured without 1.3 Cathodic protection

recourse to the emergency source of power;
1.4.1 Details of impressed-current cathodic
.2 electrical services essential for safety will be protection systems, including installation and
assured in case of failure of the main source of locations, are to be submitted for approval when
electrical power; such systems are installed.
.3 electromagnetic compatibility of electrical and 1.4 Alternative design and arrangements

electronic equipment is assured; and
When alternative design or arrangements
.4 the safety of personnel and unit from deviate from the provisions of the rules an
electrical hazards will be assured. engineering analysis, evaluation and approval of
the design and arrangements is to be carried out
in accordance with MODU Code 2009 (IMO
Resolution A1023(26)) Chapter 4, Sec.4.2.
Section 2
Cables and Electrical Equipment in Hazardous Areas
2.1 Electrical equipment and wiring installed in

hazardous areas are to be limited to that Table 2.1 : Electrical protection type
necessary for operational purposes. Only the
cables and types of equipment described in this Type Protection method
section may be installed. Selection and ia and ib Intrinsic safety
installation of equipment and cables in d Flameproof enclosures
hazardous areas are to be in accordance with e Increased safety
international standards. (Refer to the list of m Encapsulation
recommendations ‘A’ by the International n Non incendive
Electrotechnical Commission given at Annex 1 o Oil immersion
to this chapter). p Pressurized enclosures
q Powder filling
2.2 In selection of electrical apparatus for use in
s Special
hazardous areas, consideration is to be given to:
2.4 Types of electrical equipment permitted are
2.2.1 the zone in which the apparatus will be
to be determined according to the electrical
used;
hazardous area classification of the location in
which the equipment is to be installed.
2.2.2 the sensitivity to ignition of the gases or
Permissible equipment is shown by an “x” in
vapours likely to be present, expressed as a gas
Table 2.2. The use of type “o” (oil immersion) is
group; and
to be limited. For transportable apparatus,
protection type “o” is to not be used.
2.2.3 the sensitivity of the gases or vapours
likely to be present to ignition by hot surfaces,
expressed as a temperature classification.
Table 2.2 : Type of electrical apparatus used in
2.3 Electrical apparatus used in hazardous hazardous zones
areas is to be manufactured, tested, marked and Protection ia ib d e m n o p q s
installed in accordance with international Type
standards and certified by an independent Zone 0 x
testing laboratory recognized by the IRS. (Refer Zone 1 x x x x x x x x
to the list of recommendations ‘B’ by the
Zone 2 x x x x x x x x x x
International Electrotechnical Commission given
at Annex 1 to this chapter).
Equipment classified in accordance with the
Table 2.1 protection classes may be used:

Page 3 of 12
___________________________________________________________________________________
2.5 Group selection for electrical equipment is to Table 2.4 : Relationship among
be as follows: temperature class, maximum surface
Electrical Electrical Gas/vapou
2.5.1 Group II is to be selected for types “e”, apparatus apparatus r ignition
“m”, “n”, “o”, “p”, “q” and “s” apparatus. maximum tempera-
Temperature
class surface ture (°C)
2.5.2 Group IIA, IIB or IIC is to be selected for temperature
types “i”, “d”, and certain types of “n” apparatus (°C)
according to Table 2.3. T1 450 >450
T2 300 >300
Table 2.3 : Relationship between T3 200 >200
gas/vapour group and permitted T4 135 >135
Gas/ Electrical equipment group T5 100 >100
vapour T6 85 >85
IIC
IIB or IIC
2.8 Electrical cables are to meet the following:
IIB
IIA IIA, IIB or IIC
2.8.1 Only cables associated with type “ia”
2.6 Electrical apparatus is to be so selected that equipment are to be permitted in zone 0 areas.
its maximum surface temperature will not reach
ignition temperature of any gas/vapour possibly 2.8.2 Thermoplastic sheathed cables,
presenting in the hazardous areas in which the thermosetting sheathed cables or elastomeric
electrical apparatus is located. The relationship sheathed cables are to be used for fixed wiring
among equipment temperature class, equipment in zone 2 areas.
maximum surface temperature, gas/vapour
ignition temperature is shown in Table 2.4. 2.8.3 Flexible and portable cables, where
necessary, used in zone 1 and zone 2 areas are
2.7 Electrical apparatus located in hazardous to be to the satisfaction of IRS.
drilling well and mud processing areas is to
meet at least Group IIA and temperature class 2.8.4 Permanently installed, fixed cable passing
T3. through zone 1 hazardous areas is to be fitted
with conductive covering, braiding or sheathed
for earth detection.
Section 3
Main Source of Power

3.1 For non-self-propelled drilling units 3.1.4 A main electrical lighting system which is
to provide illumination throughout those parts of
3.1.1 Every unit is to be provided with a main the unit normally accessible to and used by
source of electrical power which is to include at personnel is to be supplied from the main
least two generating sets. source of power.
3.1.2 The power of these sets is to be such that 3.1.5 The arrangement of the main lighting
it is still possible to ensure the functioning of the system is to be such that a fire or other casualty
services referred to in 1.2.4, except for power in the space or spaces containing the main
servicing drilling operations, in the event of any source of power, including transformers or
one of these generating sets being stopped. converters, if any, will not render the emergency
lighting system under section 4 inoperative.
3.1.3 Where transformers or converters
constitute an essential part of the supply 3.1.6 The arrangement of the emergency
system, the system is to be so arranged as to lighting system is to be such that a fire or other
ensure the same continuity of the supply as casualty in the space or spaces containing the
stated in 3.1.2. emergency source of power, including
transformers or converters, if any, will not render
Page 4 of 12
the main lighting system required by this section source of power out of operation, the remaining
inoperative. generator or generators will be capable of
providing the electrical services necessary to
3.1.7 The main source of electrical power is to start the main propulsion plant from a dead ship
comply with the following: condition. The emergency generator may be
used for the purpose of starting from a dead
.1 Where the electrical power can normally be ship condition if its capability either alone or
supplied by one generator, suitable load- combined with that of any generator is sufficient
shedding arrangements are to be provided to to provide at the same time those services
ensure the integrity of supplies to services required by 4.1.10 unless an independent
required for propulsion and steering as well as supply from an accumulator battery suitably
the safety of the unit. In the case of loss of the located for use in an emergency and sufficient
generator in operation, adequate provision is to for the period of 18 h is installed.
be made for automatic starting and connecting
to the main switchboard of a stand-by generator .3 For electrically self-propelled units the
of sufficient capacity to ensure safe navigation application of 3.1.2 need only include for
when underway and to ensure the safety of the propulsion sufficient power to ensure safe
unit with automatic restarting of the essential navigation when underway.
auxiliaries including, where necessary,
sequential operations. IRS may dispense with .4 Where electrical power is necessary to
these provisions where the power necessary to restore propulsion, the capacity is to be
ensure the functioning of the service referred to sufficient to restore propulsion to the unit in
in 1.2.4, except for power servicing drilling conjunction with other machinery, as
operations, is 250 kW or less. appropriate, from a dead ship condition within
30 min after blackout.
.2 If the electrical power is normally supplied by
more than one generator simultaneously in 3.2.2 The main switchboard is to be so placed
parallel operation, provision is to be made, for relative to one main generating station that, as
instance, by load shedding to ensure that, in far as is practicable, the integrity of the normal
case of loss of one of these generating sets, the supply may be affected only by a fire or other
remaining ones are kept in operation without casualty in one space. An environmental
overload to ensure safe navigation when enclosure for the main switchboard, such as
underway and to ensure the safety of the unit. may be provided by a machinery control room
situated within the main boundaries of the
3.2 For self-propelled drilling units space, is not to be considered as separating the
switchboards from the generators.
3.2.1 In addition to complying with section 3.1,
the main source of electrical power is to comply 3.2.3 Where the main source of electrical power
with the following: is necessary for propulsion of the unit, the main
busbar is to be subdivided into at least two parts
.1 The arrangement of the unit’s main source of which are to normally be connected by circuit
power is to be such that the services referred to breakers or other approved means; so far as is
in 1.2.4 can be maintained regardless of the practicable, the connection of generating sets
speed and direction of the main propelling and other duplicated equipment is to be equally
engines or shafting. divided between the parts
.2 The generating plant is to be such as to

ensure that with any one generator or its primary

Page 5 of 12
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 4
Emergency Source of Power
4.1 For non-self-propelled drilling units considered satisfied without an additional

emergency source of electrical power, provided
4.1.1 Every unit is to be provided with a self- that IRS is satisfied that:
contained emergency source of power
.1 there are at least two generating sets,
4.1.2 The emergency source of power is to be meeting the provisions of 4.1.15 and each of
installed in a non-hazardous space. The sufficient capacity to meet the provisions of
emergency source of power, the transitional 4.1.6, in each of at least two spaces;
source of emergency power and the emergency
switchboard is to be located on or above the .2 the arrangements under 4.1.5.1 in each such
uppermost continuous deck and above the worst space are equivalent to those under 4.1.8 and
damage waterline and inboard of the damage 4.1.11 to 4.1.14 and 4.3 so that a source of
conditions specified in Ch. 5 and be readily electrical power is available at all times to the
accessible. They are to not be forward of the services under 4.1.6;
collision bulkhead, if any.
.3 the location of each of the spaces referred to
4.1.3 The location of emergency source of in 4.1.5.1 is in compliance with 4.1.2 and the
power and its arrangement in relation to the boundaries meet the provisions of 4.1.3 except
main source of electric power is to be such as to that contiguous boundaries are to consist of an
ensure that a fire, flooding or other failure in the “A-60” bulkhead and a cofferdam, or a steel
space containing the main source or in any bulkhead insulated to class “A-60” on both
machinery space of category A will not interfere sides.
with the supply or distribution of emergency
power. As far as practical, the space containing 4.1.6 The power available is to be sufficient to
the emergency source of power, the transitional supply all services necessary for the safety of all
source of emergency power and the emergency on board in an emergency due regard being
switchboard are to not be contiguous to paid to such services as may have to be
boundaries of machinery spaces of category A operated simultaneously. The emergency
or of those spaces containing the main source of source of power is to be capable, having regard
electrical power. Where the emergency source to starting currents and the transitory nature of
of power, the transitional source of emergency certain loads, of supplying simultaneously at
power, and the emergency switchboard are least the following services for the periods
contiguous to the boundaries of machinery specified hereinafter, if they depend upon an
spaces of category A or to those spaces electrical source for their operation.
containing the main source of electrical power,
or to spaces of zone 1 or zone 2, the contiguous .1 For a period of 18 hours the following lighting:
boundaries are to be in compliance with Ch.14,
1.5 i. Navigation lights, special purpose lights,
warning system, other lights and sound
4.1.4 Provided that suitable measures are taken signals, required by the International
for safeguarding independent emergency Regulations for the Prevention of
operation under all circumstances, the Collisions at Sea, in force
emergency switchboard may be used to supply
non-emergency circuits, and the emergency ii. Emergency lighting for machinery
generator may be used exceptionally and for spaces and main generating stations
short periods to supply non-emergency circuits. including their control positions, control
stations and in all machinery control
4.1.5 For units where the main source of rooms, at every embarkation station on
electrical power is located in two or more spaces deck and over sides, all service and
which have their own systems, including power accommodation alleyways, personnel lift
distribution and control systems, completely cars, and personnel lift trunks, stairways
independent of the systems in the other spaces and exits.
and such that a fire or other casualty in any one
of the spaces will not affect the power iii. Emergency lighting for personnel lift
distribution from the others, or to the services cars and personnel lift trunks.
under 4.1.6, the provisions of 4.1.1 may be

Page 6 of 12
iv. Emergency lighting in all spaces from level indicating system, tank level
which control of the drilling process is indicating system, and the largest single
performed and where controls of ballast pump required by Ch. 12.
machinery essential for this process, or
devices for emergency switching-off of .3 For a period of half an hour:
the power plant are located.
i. power to operate the watertight doors as
v. Emergency lighting at the storage provided under Ch. 5, 2.3.1.(b), but not
position(s) for firemen's outfits. necessarily all of them simultaneously,
unless an independent temporary source
vi. Emergency lighting at the sprinkler of stored energy is provided; and
pump if any, at one of the fire pumps if
dependent upon the emergency ii. power to operate the controls and
generator for its source of power, at the indicators provided under Ch. 5, 2.3.1.(b).
emergency bilge pump if any, and at
their starting positions. .4 For a period of four days signalling lights and
sound signals required for marking of offshore
vii. Emergency lighting on helicopter decks structures
to include perimeter and helideck status
lights, wind direction indicator 4.1.7 The emergency source of power may be
illumination, and related obstruction either a generator or an accumulator battery.
lights, if any.
4.1.8 Where the emergency source of power is
.2 For a period of 18 hours the following a generator it is to be:
equipment:
.1 driven by a suitable prime mover with an
i. General alarm and communications independent supply of fuel, having a flashpoint
systems that is required in an of not less than 43°C;
emergency.
.2 started automatically upon failure of the
ii. Fire and gas detection systems and normal electrical supply unless a transitional
their alarms, intermittent operation of source of emergency power in accordance with
the manual fire alarms and all internal 4.1.8.3 is provided; where the emergency
signals that are required in an generator is automatically started, it is to be
emergency automatically connected to the emergency
switchboard; those services referred to in 4.1.10
iii. Fire extinguishing systems. are to then be connected automatically to the
emergency generator; and unless a second
iv. One of the fire pumps, if dependent independent means of starting the emergency
upon the emergency generator for its generator is provided, the single source of
source of power. stored energy is to be protected to preclude its
complete depletion by the automatic starting
v. Permanently installed diving equipment system; and
necessary for the safe conduct of diving
operations, if dependent upon the .3 provided with a transitional source of
drilling unit's electrical power. emergency power, as specified in 4.1.10, unless
the emergency generator is capable of
vi. Abandonment systems dependent on supplying the services mentioned in 4.1.10 and
electric power of being automatically started and supplying the
required load as quickly as is safe and
vii. The capability of closing the blow-out practicable but in not more than 45 [s].
preventer and of disconnecting the
drilling unit from the well head 4.1.9 Where the emergency source of power is
arrangement, if electrically controlled, an accumulator battery it is to be capable of:
unless it has an independent supply
from an accumulator battery suitably .1 carrying the emergency load without
located for use in an emergency and recharging while maintaining the voltage of the
sufficient for the period of 18 hours. battery throughout the discharge period within
plus or minus 12% of its nominal voltage;
viii. On Column Stabilized Drilling Units:
Ballast valve control system, ballast
valve position indicating system, draft

Page 7 of 12
___________________________________________________________________________________
.2 automatically connecting to the emergency 4.1.13 The emergency switchboard is to be
switchboard in the event of failure of the main supplied in normal operation from the main
power supply; and switchboard by an interconnector feeder which
is to be adequately protected at the main
.3 immediately supplying at least those services switchboard against overload and short circuit.
specified in 4.1.10. The arrangement at the emergency switchboard
is to be such that the interconnector feeder is
4.1.10 The transitional source or sources of disconnected automatically at the emergency
emergency power, under 4.1.8.3, are to consist switchboard upon failure of the main power
of an accumulator battery suitably located for supply. Where the system is arranged for
use in an emergency, which is to operate feedback operation, the interconnector feeder is
without recharging whilst maintaining the voltage to also be protected at the emergency
of the battery throughout the discharge period switchboard at least against short circuit.
within plus or minus 12% of its nominal voltage,
and be of sufficient capacity and so arranged as 4.1.14 In order to ensure ready availability of
to supply automatically, in the event of failure of emergency supplies, arrangements are to be
either the main or the emergency source of made where necessary to disconnect non-
power, the following services for half an hour at emergency circuits automatically from the
least if they depend upon an electrical source for emergency switchboard to ensure that power is
their operation: available automatically to the emergency
circuits.
.1 the lighting under 4.1.6.1. For this transitional
phase, the required emergency lighting, in 4.1.15 The emergency generator and its prime
respect of the machinery space and mover and any emergency accumulator battery
accommodation and service areas, may be are to be designed to function at full rated power
provided by permanently fixed, individual when upright and when inclined up to the
accumulator lamps which are automatically maximum angle of heel in the intact and
charged and operated; damaged condition, as determined in
accordance with chapter 5. In no case need the
.2 all essential internal communication equipment be designed to operate when inclined
equipment under 4.1.6.2.i and 4.1.6.2.ii; and more than:
.3 intermittent operation of the services referred .1 25° in any direction on a column-stabilized

to in 4.1.6.2.vii, unit;
unless, in the case of 4.1.10.2 and 4.1.10.3, .2 15° in any direction on a self-elevating unit;
they have an independent supply from an and
accumulator battery suitably located for use in
an emergency and sufficient for the period .3 22.5° about the longitudinal axis and/or when
specified. inclined 10° about the transverse axis on a
surface unit.
4.1.11 The emergency switchboard is to be
installed as near as is practicable to the 4.1.16 Provision is to be made for the periodic
emergency source of power and, where the testing of the complete emergency system.
emergency source of power is a generator, the This is to include the testing of transitional
emergency switchboard is to preferably be sources and automatic starting arrangements.
located in the same space.
4.2 For self-propelled drilling units
4.1.12 No accumulator battery fitted to meet the
provisions for emergency or transitional power In addition to complying with section 4.1, the
supply is to be installed in the same space as emergency source of power is to provide:
the emergency switchboard, unless appropriate
measures to the satisfaction of IRS are taken to .1 For a period of 18 hours, emergency lighting
extract the gases discharged from the said at the steering gear;
batteries. An indicator is to be mounted in a
suitable place on the main switchboard or in the .2 For a period of 18 hours:
machinery control room to indicate when the
batteries constituting either the emergency .2.1 navigational aids as required by MODU
source of power or the transitional source of Code 2009 (IMO Resolution A1023(26)) Chapter
power, referred to in 4.1.10 or 4.1.11, are being 7, Sec.7.10;
discharged.

Page 8 of 12
.2.2 intermittent operation of the daylight

signalling lamp and the unit’s whistle; unless 4.3.4 Electrical and hydraulic starting systems
they have an independent supply from an are to be maintained from the emergency
accumulator battery suitably located for use in switchboard.
an emergency and sufficient for the period of 18
hours; 4.3.5 Compressed air starting systems may be
maintained by the main or auxiliary compressed
.3 For the period of 30 min or a lesser period as air receivers, through a suitable non-return valve
permitted by MODU Code 2009 (IMO Resolution or by an emergency air compressor energized
A1023(26)) Chapter 7, Sec.7.10, the steering by the emergency switchboard.
gear.
4.3.6 All of these starting, charging and energy
4.3 Starting arrangements for emergency storing devices are to be located in the
generators emergency generator room; these devices are
to not be used for any purpose other than the
4.3.1 Emergency generators are to be capable operation of the emergency generator set. This
of being readily started in their cold condition does not preclude the supply to the air receiver
down to a temperature of 0°C. If this is of the emergency generator set from the main or
impracticable, or if lower temperatures are likely auxiliary compressed air system through a non-
to be encountered, consideration is to be given return valve fitted in the emergency generator
to the provision and maintenance of heating room.
arrangements, acceptable to IRS, so that ready
starting will be assured. 4.3.7 When automatic starting is not required by
these provisions and where it can be
4.3.2 Each emergency generator which is demonstrated as being effective, hand (manual)
arranged to be automatically started is to be starting is permissible, such as manual cranking,
equipped with starting arrangements acceptable inertia starters, manual hydraulic accumulators,
to IRS with a storage energy capability of at or powder cartridges.
least three consecutive starts. A second source
of energy is to be provided for an additional 4.3.8 When hand (manual) starting is not
three starts within 30 min unless hand (manual) practicable, the provisions in 4.3.2 and 4.3.3 to
starting can be demonstrated to be effective. 4.3.6 are to be complied with, except that
starting may be manually initiated.
4.3.3 Provision is to be made to maintain the
stored energy at all times.
Section 5
Precautions against Shock, Fire and other Hazards of

Electrical Origin
5.1 Exposed metal parts of electrical machines 5.2 IRS may require additional precautions for
or equipment which are not intended to be live portable electrical equipment for use in confined
but which are liable under fault conditions to or exceptionally damp spaces where particular
become live are to be earthed (grounded) risks due to conductivity may exist.
unless the machines or equipment are:
5.3 All electrical apparatus are to be so
.1 supplied at a voltage not exceeding 55 V constructed and so installed that it does not
direct current or 55 V, root mean square cause injury when handled or touched in the
between conductors; auto-transformers are to normal manner.
not be used for the purpose of achieving this
voltage; or 5.4 Where not obtained through normal
construction, arrangements are to be provided
.2 supplied at a voltage not exceeding 250 V by to effectively earth (ground) all permanently
safety isolating transformers supplying only one installed machinery, metal structures of derricks,
consuming device; or masts and helicopter decks.
.3 constructed in accordance with the principle 5.5 Switchboards are to be so arranged as to

of double insulation. give easy access, where needed, to apparatus

Page 9 of 12
___________________________________________________________________________________
and equipment, in order to minimize danger to Where practicable all such cables are to be run
personnel. The sides and backs and, where in such a manner as to preclude their being
necessary, the fronts of switchboards are to be rendered unserviceable by heating of the
suitably guarded. Exposed live parts having bulkheads that may be caused by a fire in an
voltages to earth (ground) exceeding 50V are adjacent space.
not to be installed on the front of such
switchboards. There are to be non-conducting 5.11 Cables and wiring are to be installed and
mats or gratings at the front and rear, where supported in such a manner as to avoid chafing
necessary. or other damage. Refer to the recommendations
published by the International Electrotechnical
5.6 Distribution systems with hull return are to Commission concerning flame-retarding
not be installed, but this does not preclude, properties of bunched cables and characteristics
under conditions approved by IRS, the of cables of a fire-resistant type.
installation of:
5.12 Terminations and joints in all conductors
.1 impressed current cathodic protective are to be so made that they retain the original
systems; electrical, mechanical, flame-retarding and,
where necessary, fire-resisting properties of the
.2 limited and locally earthed systems (e.g., cable.
engine starting systems);
5.13 Each separate circuit is to be protected
.3 limited and locally earthed welding systems; against short circuit and against overload,
where IRS is satisfied that the equipotential of except as permitted in Ch. 12, 1.5.6, or where
the structure is assured in a satisfactory IRS may exceptionally otherwise permit.
manner, welding systems with hull return may
be installed without this restriction; and 5.14 The rating or appropriate setting of the
overload protection device for each circuit is to
.4 insulation level monitoring devices provided be permanently indicated at the location of the
the circulation current does not exceed 30 mA protection device.
under the most unfavourable conditions.
5.15 Lighting fittings are to be so arranged as to
5.7 When a distribution system, whether primary prevent temperature rises which could damage
or secondary, for power, heating or lighting, with the cables and wiring, and to prevent
no connection to earth is used, a device capable surrounding material from becoming excessively
of continuously monitoring the insulation level to hot.
earth and of giving an audible or visual
indication of abnormally low insulation values is 5.16 Accumulator batteries are to be suitably
to be provided. housed, and compartments used primarily for
their accommodation are to be properly
5.8 Except as permitted by IRS in exceptional constructed and efficiently ventilated.
circumstances, all metal sheaths and armour of
cables are to be electrically continuous and are 5.17 Electrical or other equipment which may
to be earthed (grounded). constitute a source of ignition of flammable
vapours are to not be permitted in these
5.9 All electric cables and wiring external to compartments except as permitted in 5.19.
equipment are to be at least of a flame-retardant
type and are to be so installed as not to impair 5.18 Accumulator batteries, except for batteries
their original flame-retarding properties. Where of self-contained battery-operated lights, are to
necessary for particular applications, IRS may not be located in sleeping quarters. IRS may
permit the use of special types of cables such as grant exemptions from or equivalencies to this
radio frequency cables, which do not comply provision where hermetically sealed batteries
with the foregoing. are installed.
5.10 Cables and wiring serving essential or 5.19 In paint lockers, acetylene stores, and
emergency power, lighting, internal similar spaces where flammable mixtures are
communications or signals are to, so far as liable to collect as well as any compartment
practicable, be routed clear of galleys, assigned principally to accumulator batteries, no
machinery spaces of category A and their electrical equipment is to be installed unless IRS
casings and other high fire risk areas. Cables is satisfied that such equipment is:
connecting fire pumps to the emergency
switchboard are to be of a fire-resistant type .1 essential for operational purposes;
where they pass through high fire risk areas.

Page 10 of 12
.2 of a type which will not ignite the mixture compartment. If electrical equipment cannot be
concerned; excluded from such a compartment it is to be so
designed and used as to minimize the risk of fire
.3 appropriate to the space concerned; and or explosion.
.4 appropriately certified for safe usage in the 5.21 Where spilling or impingement of liquids
vapours or gases likely to be encountered. could occur upon any electrical control or alarm
console, or similar electrical enclosure essential
5.20 Electrical apparatus and cables are to, to the safety of the unit, such equipment is to
where practicable, be excluded from any have suitable protection against the ingress of
compartment in which explosives are stored. liquids.
Where lighting is required, the light is to come
from outside, through the boundaries of the
Section 6
Emergency Shutdown Facilities
6.1 Emergency conditions due to drilling positioning system in order to preserve the
operations integrity of the well.
6.1.1 In view of exceptional conditions in which 6.1.4 Disconnection or shutdown is to be

the explosion hazard may extend outside the possible from at least two strategic locations,
areas defined in Ch. 11, special arrangements one of which should be outside hazardous
are to be provided to facilitate the selective dis- areas.
connection of shutdown of:
6.1.5 Shutdown systems that are provided to
 Ventilating system except fans necessary comply with paragraph 6.1.1 are to be so
for supplying combustion air to prime designed that the risk of unintentional stoppages
movers for the production of electrical caused by malfunction in a shutdown system
power; and the risk of inadvertent operation of a
shutdown are minimized.
 All electrical equipment outside Zone 1
areas, except where of a certified safe 6.2 Equipment remaining operational after
type for Zone 1 applications emergency shutdown
 Main electrical generators and prime 6.2.1 At least the following facilities are to be
movers including the ventilation systems operable after an emergency shutdown.
for these; Equipment which is located in spaces other than
enclosed spaces and arranged to be operated
 Emergency equipment except those after complete shutdown as given in 4.1 is to be
items listed in 6.2 suitable for installation in Zone 2 locations. Such
equipment, when located in enclosed spaces, is
 Emergency generators prime movers . to be suitable for its intended application to the
satisfaction of IRS:
6.1.2 Initiation of the foregoing shutdown of
facilities will be the operator's responsibility. The  Emergency lighting required by 4.1.6.1 for
initiated action may vary according to the nature half an hour;
of the emergency. A recommended sequence of  blow-out preventer control system;
shutdowns is to be included in the Operating  General alarm system;
Booklet.  Public address system; and
 Battery supplied radio communication
6.1.3 In the case of units using dynamic installations.
positioning systems as a sole means of position
keeping, special consideration may be given to Adequate power supply from a separate UPS is
the selective disconnection or shutdown of to be provided for the above.
machinery and equipment associated with
maintaining the operability of the dynamic

Rules and Regulations for the Construction and Classification of Steel Ships
Page 11 of 12
_________________________________________________________________________________
Section 7
Alarms and Internal Communication

7.1 Alarms and indicators are to be installed in navigation bridge, engine control room, ballast
accordance with the recommendations of IRS. control station, jacking control station, and a
location near the drilling console.
7.2 Each unit is to be provided with a general
alarm system so installed as to be clearly 7.4 The signals given over the general alarm
perceptible in all normally accessible parts of the system are to be supplemented by instructions
unit, including open decks. Control stations for over the public address system.
activating the alarm are to be installed to the
satisfaction of IRS. The signals used are to be 7.5 Internal means of communication are to be
limited to: general emergency, toxic gas available for transfer of information between all
(hydrogen sulphide), combustible gas, fire spaces where action may be necessary in case
alarm, and abandon unit signals. These signals of an emergency.
are to be described in the muster list and
operations manual. 7.6 Audible signals in high noise areas are to be
supplemented with visual signals. Internal
7.3 A public address system is to be provided. means of communication are to be available for
The system is to be clearly audible in all spaces transfer of information between all spaces where
that are normally accessible to personnel during action may be necessary in case of an
routine operations. It is to be possible to make emergency.
announcements at the following locations (if
provided): Emergency response centre,

Page 12 of 12
Annex-1
List of IEC Standards
List of recommendations ‘A’ by the International Electrotechnical Commission:
IEC 61892-1:2001 Mobile and fixed offshore units − Electrical installations − Part 1: General
requirements and conditions.
IEC 61892-2:2005 Mobile and fixed offshore units − Electrical installations − Part 2: System design.
IEC 61892-3:2007 Mobile and fixed offshore units − Electrical installations − Part 3: Equipment.
IEC 61892-4:2007 Mobile and fixed offshore units − Electrical installations − Part 4: Cables.
IEC 61892-5:2000 Mobile and fixed offshore units − Electrical Installations − Part 5: Mobile units.
IEC 61892-6:2007 Mobile and fixed offshore units − Electrical installations − Part 6: Installation.
IEC 61892-7:2007 Mobile and fixed offshore units − Electrical installations − Part 7: Hazardous areas.
List of recommendations ‘B’ by the International Electrotechnical Commission:
IEC 60079-4: 1975 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres − Part 4: Method of test for
ignition temperature.
IEC 60079-4A: 1970 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres − Part 4: Method of test for
ignition temperature − First supplement.
IEC 60079-10: 2002 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres − Part 10: Classification of
hazardous areas.
IEC/TR 60079-12: 1978 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres − Part 12: Classification of
mixtures of gases of vapours with air according to their maximum experimental safe gaps and minimum
igniting currents.
IEC/TR 60079-13: 1982-01 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmosphere − Part 13: Construction
and use of rooms or buildings protected by pressurization.
IEC 60079-14: 2007-12 Explosive atmospheres − Part 14: Electrical installations design, selection and
erection.
IEC/TR 60079-16: 1990 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres − Part 16: Artificial ventilation
for the protection of analyser(s) houses.
IEC 60079-17: 2007 Explosive atmospheres − Part 17: Electrical installations inspection and
maintenance.
IEC 60079-19: 2006-10 Explosive atmospheres − Part 19: Equipment repair, overhaul and reclamation.
IEC/TR 60079-20: 1996 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres − Part 20: Data for
flammable gases and vapours, relating to the use of electrical apparatus.
IEC 60079-25: 2003 Electrical apparatus for explosive gas atmospheres − Part 25: Intrinsically safe
systems.
IEC 60079-27: 2008 Explosive atmospheres − Part 27: Fieldbus intrinsically safe concept (FISCO).
IEC 60079-28: 2006 Explosive atmospheres − Part 28: Protection of equipment and transmission
systems using optical radiation.
IEC 60079-29-1: 2007 Explosive atmospheres − Part 29-1: Gas detectors − Performance requirements of
detectors for flammable gases.
IEC 60079-29-2: 2007 Explosive atmospheres − Part 29-2: Gas detectors − Selection, installation, use
and maintenance of detectors for flammable gases and oxygen.
IEC 60079-30-1: 2007 Explosive atmospheres − Part 30-1: Electrical resistance trace heating − General
and testing requirements.
IEC 60079-30-2: 2007 Explosive atmospheres − Part 30-2: Electrical resistance trace heating −
Application guide for design, installation and maintenance.
End Of Chapter

Page 1 of 22
___________________________________________________________________________________
Chapter 14
Safety Features
Contents
Section
1 General
2 Structural Fire Protection
3 Prevention of Fire
4 Fire Protection of Ventilation Ducts
5 Fire and Gas Detection and Alarm Systems
6 Fire Fighting Water Supply
7 Other Fire Fighting Arrangements
8 Escape
9 Fire Fighting Equipment for Helicopter Facilities
10 Operational Readiness and Maintenance
11 Alarms
Section 1
General
1.1 Fire Safety
1.1.4 When fire safety design or arrangements
1.1.1 Fire protection arrangements and fire deviate from the provisions of the Rules,
extinguishing systems are to be in accordance engineering analysis, evaluation and approval of
with the requirements in sections 2 to 10 of this the alternative design and arrangements is to be
chapter. carried out in accordance with Rules &
Regulations For The Construction &
1.1.2 Attention is drawn to the appropriate Classification of Steel Ships Pt. 6, Ch. 6.
governmental authority in each case, as there
may be additional requirements, depending on 1.2 Fire control plan
the size, type and intended service of the drilling
units as well as other particulars and details. 1.2.1 A fire control plan complying with Rules &
Consideration will be given to fire protection Regulations For The Construction &
arrangements and fire extinguishing systems Classification of Steel Ships Pt. 6, Ch. 5, Sec
which comply with the published requirements of 2.2.4 is to be submitted for review and
the governmental authority of the country in permanently exhibited on board on which the
which the drilling unit is to be registered. following as a minimum, should be clearly
shown:
Also, attention is directed to IMO Resolution
A.1023(26) regarding Code for the Construction (1) Locations of fire control stations;
and Equipment of Mobile Offshore Drilling Units,
2009 (2009 MODU CODE). (2) Various fire sections enclosed by various
classes of fire divisions;
1.1.3 Fire safety systems are to be in
accordance with Rules & Regulations For The (3) Arrangement of fire detectors and manual
Construction & Classification of Steel Ships, Pt. fire alarm stations;
6, Ch. 8, as applicable.

Page 2 of 22
(4) Arrangement of combustible gas (13) The Ventilating system including Fire
detectors; dampers positions, Ventilating Fans
control positions with indication of
(5) Arrangement of hydrogen sulphide gas identification numbers of Ventilating Fans
detectors; serving each section;
(14) Arrangement of fire/watertight doors and
(6) Locations of respiratory protection their remote control positions;
equipment for hydrogen sulphide;
(15) Blowout preventer control positions;
(7) General alarm actuating positions;
(16) Escape route and means of access to
(8) Arrangement of various fire-extinguishing different compartments, decks, etc.;
appliances;
(17) Locations of Emergency Escape
(9) Locations of Fire-fighter’s Outfits; Breathing Devices (EEBD); and
(10) Location of Helicopter Crash Kit; (18) Arrangement of emergency muster

stations and life-saving appliances.
(11) Arrangement of water spray nozzles and
sprinklers (if fitted); 1.3 Other Safety arrangements
(12) Locations of emergency shutdown (such 1.3.1 Alarms for the safety of the unit are to be
as oil fuel source shutdown, engine as given in section 11.
shutdown, etc.) stations;
Section 2
Structural Fire Protection
2.1 General “A-60” standard for the whole of the portion

which faces and is within 30 [m] of the centre of
2.1.1 These provisions have been formulated the rotary table. For units that have a movable
principally for units having their hull substructure the 30 [m] is to be measured with
superstructure, structural bulkheads, decks and the substructure at its closest drilling position to
deckhouses constructed of steel. the accommodation. IRS may accept equivalent
arrangements
2.1.2 Units constructed of other materials may
be accepted, provided that, in the opinion of 2.2.2 The following provisions are to govern
IRS, they provide an equivalent standard of application of the tables:
safety.
.1 Tables 2.1 and 2.2 are to apply respectively
2.1.3 Structural fire protection details, materials to the bulkheads and decks separating adjacent
and methods of construction are to be in spaces.
accordance with the FTP Code, as applicable,
and Rules & Regulations For The Construction .2 For determining the appropriate fire integrity
& Classification of Steel Ships Pt. 6, Ch. 2, Sec standards to be applied to divisions between
2.3 and Sec. 3, as applied to cargo ships. adjacent spaces, such spaces are classified
according to their fire risk, as shown in
2.2 Fire integrity of bulkheads and decks categories (1) to (11) below. The title of each
category is intended to be typical rather than
2.2.1 In addition to complying with the specific restrictive. The number in parenthesis preceding
provisions for fire integrity of bulkheads and each category refers to the applicable column or
decks in this section and in section 2.3, the row in the tables:
minimum fire integrity of bulkheads and decks is
to be as prescribed in tables 2.1 and 2.2. (1) Control stations are spaces as defined in Ch.
Exterior boundaries of superstructures and 1, Sec. 2, Cl. 25.
deckhouses enclosing accommodation,
including any overhanging decks which support (2) Corridors means corridors and lobbies.
such accommodation, are to be constructed to

Page 3 of 22
___________________________________________________________________________________
(3) Accommodation spaces are spaces as having insulation of different values, the
defined in Ch. 1, Sec. 2, 25), excluding insulation with the higher value is to continue on
corridors, lavatories and pantries containing no the deck or bulkhead with the insulation of the
cooking appliances. lesser value for a distance of at least 450 [mm].
(4) Stairways are interior stairways, lifts and 2.2.5 Windows and sidescuttles, with the
escalators (other than those wholly contained exception of navigating bridge windows, are to
within the machinery spaces) and enclosures be of the non-opening type. Navigating bridge
thereto. In this connection a stairway which is windows may be of the opening type provided
enclosed only at one level is to be regarded as the design of such windows permits rapid
part of the space from which it is not separated closure. IRS may accept windows and
by a fire door. sidescuttles outside hazardous areas to be of
the opening type.
(5) Service spaces (low risk) are lockers, store-
rooms and working spaces in which flammable 2.2.6 The fire resistance of doors is to, as far as
materials are not stored, drying rooms and practicable, be equivalent to that of the division
laundries. in which they are fitted. External doors in
superstructures and deckhouses are to be
(6) Machinery spaces of category A are spaces constructed to at least “A-0” class standard and
as defined in Ch. 1, Sec. 2, Cl. 25 be self-closing, where practicable.
(7) Other machinery spaces are spaces as 2.2.7 Self-closing doors in fire rated bulkheads
defined in Ch. 1, Sec. 2, Cl. 25 other than are not to be fitted with hold-back hooks.
machinery spaces of category A. However, hold-back arrangements incorporating
remote release fittings of the fail-safe type may
(8) Hazardous areas are areas as defined in Ch. be utilized.
1, Sec. 2, Cl. 25
2.2.8 Windows and sidescuttles in boundaries
(9) Service spaces (high risk) are lockers, store- which are required to meet an “A-60” standard
rooms and working spaces in which flammable which face the drill floor area are to be:
materials are stored, galleys, pantries containing
cooking appliances, paint rooms and workshops .1 constructed to an “A-60” standard; or
other than those forming part of the machinery
space. .2 protected by a water curtain; or
(10) Open decks are open deck spaces, .3 fitted with shutters of steel or equivalent
excluding hazardous areas. material.
(11) Sanitary and similar spaces are communal 2.3 Protection of accommodation spaces,
sanitary facilities such as showers, baths, service spaces and control stations
lavatories, etc., and isolated pantries containing
no cooking appliances. Sanitary facilities which 2.3.1 In general, accommodation spaces,
serve a space and with access only from that service spaces and control stations are to not be
space are to be considered a portion of the located adjacent to hazardous areas. However,
space in which they are located. where this is not practicable, an engineering
evaluation is to be performed to ensure that the
2.2.3 Continuous “B” class ceilings or linings in level of fire protection and blast resistance of the
association with the relevant decks or bulkheads bulkheads and decks separating these spaces
may be accepted as contributing wholly or in from the hazardous areas are adequate for the
part to the required insulation and integrity of a likely hazard.
division.
2.3.2 All bulkheads that are to be “A” class
2.2.4 In approving structural fire protection divisions are to extend from deck to deck and to
details, IRS will consider the risk of heat the deckhouse side or other boundaries.
transmission at intersections and terminal points
of required thermal barriers. The insulation of a 2.3.3 All bulkheads forming “B” class divisions
deck or bulkhead is to be carried past the are to extend from deck to deck and to the
penetration, intersection or terminal point for a deckhouse side or other boundaries, unless
distance of at least 450 [mm] in the case of steel continuous “B” class ceilings or linings are fitted
and aluminium structures. If a space is divided on both sides of the bulkhead, in which case the
with a deck or a bulkhead of “A” class standard bulkhead may terminate at the continuous
Page 4 of 22
ceiling or lining. In corridor bulkheads, 2.3.5 Stairways which penetrate only a single
ventilation openings may be permitted only in deck are to be protected at least at one level by
and under the doors of cabins, public spaces, “A” or “B” class divisions and self-closing doors
offices and sanitary spaces. The openings are to so as to limit the rapid spread of fire from one
be provided only in the lower half of the door. deck to another. Personnel lift trunks are to be
Where such an opening is in or under a door, protected by “A” class divisions. Stairways and
the total net area of any such opening or lift trunks which penetrate more than a single
openings is not to exceed 0.05 [m2]. When such deck are to be surrounded by “A” class divisions
an opening is cut in a door it is to be fitted with a and protected by self-closing doors at all levels.
grille made of non-combustible material. Such
openings are not to be provided in a door in a 2.3.6 Air spaces enclosed behind ceilings,
division forming a stairway enclosure. panellings or linings are to be divided by close
fitting draught stops spaced not more than 14
2.3.4 Stairs are to be constructed of steel or [m] apart. In the vertical direction, such enclosed
equivalent material. air spaces, including those behind linings of
stairways, trunks, etc., are to be closed at each
deck.

Page 5 of 22
___________________________________________________________________________________
Table 2.1: Fire integrity of bulkheads separating adjacent spaces
Spaces (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)
(d) (e)
Control stations (1) A-0 A-0 A-60 A-0 A-15 A-60 A-15 A-60 A-60 * A-0
B-0
Corridors (2)
C B-0 A-0(b) B-0 A-60 A-0 A-0(e) A-0 * B-0
B-0
Accommodation spaces (3)
C A-0(b) B-0 A-60 A-0 A-0(e) A-0 * C
B-0 B-0 B-0
*
Stairways (4) A-0(b) A-0(b) A-60 A-0 A-0(e) A-0 A-0(b)
Service spaces (low risk) (5) C A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 * B-0
(a)
Machinery spaces (6)
of category A * A-0(a) A-60 A-60 * A-0
(a)(c)
Other machinery spaces (7) A-0 A-0 A-0 * A-0
Hazardous areas (8) A-0 – A-0
(c)
Service spaces (high risk) (9) A-0 * A-0
Open decks (10) – *
Sanitary and similar (11)
spaces C
See notes under table 2.2.

Page 6 of 22
Table 2.2: Fire integrity of decks separating adjacent spaces
Space Space
below ↓ above → (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)
Control stations (1) A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-60 A-0 A-0(e) A-0 * A-0
(e)
Corridors (2) A-0 * * A-0 * A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 * *
(e)
Accommodation spaces (3) A-60 A-0 * A-0 * A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 * *
(e)
Stairways (4) A-0 A-0 A-0 * A-0 A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 * A-0
Service spaces (low risk) (5) A-15 A-0 A-0 A-0 * A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 * A-0
Machinery spaces (6) (a)
of category A A-60 A-60 A-60 A-60 A-60 * A-60 A-60 A-60 * A-0
(a) (a)
Other machinery spaces (7) A-15 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 * A-0
*
(e) (e) (e) (e)
Hazardous areas (8) A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-60 A-0 – A-0 * A-0
Service spaces (high risk) (9) A-60

A-60 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0(c) * A-0
Open decks (10) * * * * * * * – * – *
Sanitary and (11)
similar spaces A-0 A-0 * A-0 * A-0 A-0 A-0 A-0 * *
Notes: to be applied to tables 2.1 and 2.2, as appropriate.
(a) Where the space contains an emergency power source or components of an emergency power source adjoining a space containing a ship’s service generator or
the components of a ship’s service generator, the boundary bulkhead or deck between those spaces is to be an “A-60” class division.
(b) For clarification as to which note applies see 2.3.3 and 2.3.5.
(c) Where spaces are of the same numerical category and superscript “c” appears, a bulkhead or deck of the rating shown in the tables is only required when the
adjacent spaces are for a different purpose, e.g., in category (9), a galley next to a galley does not require a bulkhead but a galley next to a paint room requires an “A-
0” bulkhead.
(d) Bulkheads separating the navigating bridge, chartroom and radio room from each other may be “B-0” rating.
(e) An engineering evaluation is to be conducted in accordance with 2.3.1. In no case the bulkhead or deck rating is to be less than the value indicated in the tables.
* Where an asterisk appears in the tables, the division is to be of steel or equivalent material, but need not be of “A” class standard. However, where a deck is
penetrated for the passage of electric cables, pipes and vent ducts, such penetrations are to be made tight to prevent the passage of flame and smoke.
Page 7 of 22
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 3
Prevention of Fire
3.1 Fire protection materials 3.3 Ventilation
3.1.1 Except for insulation in refrigerated 3.3.1 The main inlets and outlets of all
compartments, insulation material, pipe and vent ventilation systems are to be capable of being
duct lagging, ceilings, linings and bulkheads are closed from outside the spaces being ventilated.
to be of non-combustible material. Insulation of
pipe fittings for cold service systems and vapour 3.3.2 Power ventilation of accommodation
barriers and adhesives used in conjunction with spaces, service spaces, control stations,
insulation need not be non-combustible but they machinery spaces and hazardous areas is to be
are to be kept to a minimum and their exposed capable of being stopped from an easily
surfaces are to have low-flame spread accessible position outside the space being
characteristics. In spaces where penetration of served. The accessibility of this position in the
oil products is possible, the surfaces of the event of a fire in the spaces served is to be
insulation are to be impervious to oil or oil specially considered. The means provided for
vapours. stopping the power ventilation serving
machinery spaces or hazardous areas is to be
3.1.2 The framing, including grounds and the entirely separate from the means provided for
joint pieces of bulkheads, linings, ceilings and stopping ventilation of other spaces.
draught stops, are to be of non-combustible
material. 3.3.3 The ventilation of the accommodation
spaces and control stations is to be arranged in
3.1.3 All exposed surfaces in corridors and such a way as to prevent the ingress of
stairway enclosures and surfaces in concealed flammable, toxic or noxious gases or smoke
or inaccessible spaces in accommodation and from surrounding areas.
service spaces and control stations are to have
low-flame spread characteristics. Exposed 3.3.4 Means are to be provided for stopping
surfaces of ceilings in accommodation and ventilating fans serving machinery and working
service spaces and control stations are to have spaces and for closing all doorways, ventilators,
low-flame spread characteristics. annular spaces around funnels and other
openings to such spaces. These means are to
3.1.4 Bulkheads, linings and ceilings may have be capable of being operated from outside such
combustible veneers provided that the thickness spaces in case of fire.
of such veneers are not to exceed 2.5 [mm]
within any space other than corridors, stairway 3.4 Arrangements in machinery and working
enclosures and control stations where the spaces
thickness are not to exceed 1.5 [mm].
Combustible materials used on these surfaces 3.4.1 Machinery driving forced and induced
are to have a calorific value not exceeding 45 draught fans, electric motor pressurization fans,
[mJ/m2] of the area for the thickness used. oil fuel transfer pumps, oil fuel unit pumps and
other similar fuel pumps is to be fitted with
3.2 Smoke generation and Toxicity remote controls situated outside the space
concerned so that they may be stopped in the
3.2.1 Primary deck coverings, if applied within event of a fire arising in the space in which they
accommodation and service spaces and control are located.
stations, are to be of approved material which
will not readily ignite, this being determined in 3.4.2 Every oil fuel suction pipe from a storage,
accordance with the FTP Code. settling or daily service tank situated above the
double bottom is to be fitted with a cock or valve
3.2.2 Paints, varnishes and other finishes used capable of being closed from outside the space
on exposed interior surfaces are not to be concerned in the event of a fire arising in the
capable of producing excessive quantities of space in which such tanks are situated. In the
smoke and toxic products, this being determined special case of deep tanks situated in any shaft
in accordance with the FTP Code. or pipe tunnel, valves on the tanks are to be
fitted but control in the event of fire may be

Page 8 of 22
effected by means of an additional valve on the

pipeline or lines outside the tunnel or tunnels. .4 Provision is to be made for the expeditious
removal of cylinders in the event of fire.
3.5 Storage of gas cylinders
.5 “NO SMOKING” signs are to be displayed at
3.5.1 Where more than one cylinder of oxygen the gas cylinder storage rooms.
and more than one cylinder of acetylene are
carried simultaneously, such cylinders are to be .6 Where cylinders are stowed in open locations
arranged in accordance with the following: means are to be provided to:
.1 Permanent piping systems for oxyacetylene .6.1 protect cylinders and associated piping from
systems are acceptable provided that they are physical damage;
designed having due regard to standards and
codes of practice to the satisfaction of IRS. .6.2 minimize exposure to hydrocarbons; and
.2 Where two or more cylinders of each gas are .6.3 ensure suitable drainage.
intended to be carried in enclosed spaces,
separate dedicated storage rooms are to be 3.5.2 Fire-extinguishing arrangements for the
provided for each gas. protection of areas or spaces where such
cylinders are stored are to be to the satisfaction
.3 Storage rooms are to be constructed of steel, of IRS.
and be well ventilated and accessible from the
open deck.
Section 4
Fire Protection of Ventilation Ducts
4.1 Materials in the case of the deck, wholly laid on the lower
side of the deck pierced. Where ventilation ducts
4.1.1 Ventilation ducts are to be of non- with a cross-sectional area exceeding 0.02 [m2]
combustible material. Short ducts, however, not pass through class “A” bulkheads or decks, the
generally exceeding 2 [m] in length and with a opening is to be lined with a steel sheet sleeve
cross-sectional area not exceeding 0.02 [m2] unless the ducts passing through the bulkheads
need not be non-combustible, subject to the or decks are of steel in the vicinity of
following conditions: penetrations through the deck or bulkhead; the
ducts and sleeves at such places are to comply
.1 these ducts are to be of a material which, in with the following:
the opinion of IRS, has a low fire risk;
.1 The ducts or sleeves are to have a thickness
.2 they may only be used at the end of the of at least 3 [mm] and a length of at least 900
ventilation device; [mm]. When passing through bulkheads, this
length is to be divided preferably into 450 [mm]
.3 they are not to be situated less than 600 on each side of the bulkhead. These ducts, or
[mm], measured along the duct, from where it sleeves lining such ducts, are to be provided
penetrates any “A” or “B” class division including with fire insulation. The insulation is to have at
continuous “B” class ceilings. least the same fire integrity as the bulkhead or
deck through which the duct passes. Equivalent
4.2 Duct penetrations penetration protection may be provided to the
satisfaction of IRS.
4.2.1 Where a thin plated duct with a free cross-
sectional area equal to, or less than, 0.02 [m2] .2 Ducts with a cross-sectional area exceeding
passes through “A” class bulkhead or decks, the 0.075 [m2], except those serving hazardous
opening is to be lined with a steel sheet sleeve areas, are to be fitted with fire dampers in
having a thickness of at least 3 [mm] and a addition to meeting the provisions of paragraph
length of at least 200 [mm], divided preferably 4.2.1.1. The fire damper is to operate
into 100 [mm] on each side of the bulkhead or, automatically but is also to be capable of being
Page 9 of 22
___________________________________________________________________________________
closed manually from both sides of the bulkhead .6 the ducts are insulated to “A-60” class
or deck. The damper is to be provided with an standard throughout the accommodation
indicator which shows whether the damper is spaces, service spaces or control stations.
open or closed. Fire dampers are not required,
however, where ducts pass through spaces 4.3.2 Ducts provided for the ventilation of
surrounded by “A” class divisions, without accommodation spaces, service spaces or
serving those spaces, provided those ducts control stations are not to pass through
have the same fire integrity as the divisions machinery spaces of category A, galleys or
which they pierce. Operation of the damper only hazardous areas. However, IRS may allow
from one side of a division may be specially relaxation from these provisions, except for the
considered, having regard to the risk of fire in ducts passing through hazardous areas,
the spaces on each side of the division. provided that:
4.2.2 Ventilation ducts with a cross-sectional .1 the ducts where they pass through a
2
area exceeding 0.02 [m ] passing through “B” machinery space of category A or a galley are
class bulkheads are to be lined with steel sheet constructed of steel in accordance with 4.3.1.1
sleeves of 900 [mm] in length divided preferably and 4.3.1.2;
into 450 [mm] on each side of the bulkhead
unless the duct is of steel for this length. .2 automatic fire dampers are fitted close to the
boundaries penetrated; and
4.3 Arrangements of ducts
.3 the integrity of the machinery space or galley
4.3.1 In general, ventilation systems for boundaries is maintained at the penetrations; or
machinery spaces of category A, galleys and
hazardous areas are to be separated from each .4 the ducts where they pass through a
other and from the ventilation systems serving machinery space of category A or a galley are
other spaces. Ducts serving hazardous areas constructed of steel in accordance with 4.3.1.1
are not to pass through accommodation spaces, and 4.3.1.2; and
service spaces, or control spaces. Ducts
provided for the ventilation of machinery spaces .5 are insulated to “A-60” standard within the
of category A and galleys are not to pass machinery space or galley.
through accommodation spaces, control stations
or service spaces unless: 4.4 Exhaust ducts from galley ranges
.1 the ducts are constructed of steel having a 4.4.1 Where they pass through accommodation
thickness of at least 3 [mm] and 5 [mm] for ducts spaces or spaces containing combustible
the widths or diameters of which are up to and materials, the exhaust ducts from galley ranges
including 300 [mm] and 760 [mm] and over are to be of equivalent fire integrity to “A” class
respectively and, in the case of such ducts, the divisions.
widths or diameters of which are between 300
[mm] and 760 [mm], having a thickness obtained 4.4.2 Each galley exhaust duct is to be fitted
by interpolation; with:
.2 the ducts are suitably supported and .1 a grease trap readily removable for cleaning;
stiffened;
.2 a fire damper located in the galley end of the
.3 the ducts are fitted with automatic fire duct which is automatically and remotely
dampers close to the boundaries penetrated; operated and, in addition a remotely operated
and fire damper located in the exhaust end of the
duct;
.4 the ducts are insulated to “A-60” class
standard from the machinery spaces or galleys .3 arrangements, operable from within the
to a point at least 5 [m] beyond each fire galley, for shutting off the exhaust fans; and
damper; or
.4 fixed means for extinguishing a fire within the
.5 the ducts are constructed of steel in duct.
accordance with 4.3.1.1 and 4.3.1.2; and

Page 10 of 22
Section 5
Fire and Gas Detection and Alarm Systems

5.1 Fire Detection and Alarm Systems
5.1.2.2 The fire detection system is to comply
5.1.1 General with the following.
5.1.1.1 Spaces having identifiable fire risk are to .1 This fire detection system is to be so
be provided with an automatic fire detection and designed and the detectors so positioned as
alarm system. to detect rapidly the onset of fire in any part
of those spaces and under any normal
5.1.1.2 In selecting the type of detectors, their conditions of operation of the machinery and
following features should be taken into account: variations of ventilation as required by the
possible range of ambient temperatures.
(a) Capability to detect fire at the incipient Except in spaces of restricted height and
stage; where their use is specially appropriate,
detection systems using only thermal
(b) Ability to avoid spurious alarm and trips; detectors are not permitted. The detection
and system is to initiate audible and visual
alarms distinct in both respects from the
(c) Suitability to the located environment. alarms of any other system not indicating
fire, in sufficient places to ensure that the
5.1.1.3 The fire detection main indicator board is alarms are heard and observed at the
to be at a manned control station and is to be locations determined in accordance with
clearly indicate where fire has been detected. Ch.12, 1.6.6.1
5.1.2 Machinery spaces .2 After installation the system is to be tested

under varying conditions of engine operation
5.1.2.1 A fixed fire detection and alarm and ventilation.
system is to be fitted in:
.3 The fire detection system, where electrically
.1 periodically unattended machinery spaces supplied, is to be fed automatically from an
containing propulsion equipment, fired boilers, emergency source of power by a separate
internal combustion engines, oil purifiers and feeder if the main source of power fails.
similar equipment and so located that all
potential fire outbreak points are effectively 5.1.3 Accommodation and service spaces
guarded.
An automatic fire detection and alarm system is
.2 machinery spaces where: to be provided in all accommodation and service
spaces. Accommodation space is to be fitted
2.1 the installation of automatic and remote with smoke detectors. Thermal detectors are to
control system and equipments has been be fitted in galleys.
approved in lieu of continuous manning of
the spaces, and 5.1.4 Electrical rooms and control stations
2.2 the main propulsion and associated Smoke detectors are to be provided in all
machinery, including the main sources of electrical rooms and control stations.
electrical power, are provided with various
degrees of automatic or remote control and are 5.1.5 Drilling and mud processing areas
under continuous manned supervision from a
control room. Flame or thermal detectors are to be installed in
open drilling and/or mud processing areas.
The fire detection system is subject to approval Smoke detectors may be used in enclosed mud
in each case and is to be based on the self- processing areas.
monitoring principle and include facilities for
periodical testing. The fire detection main 5.1.6 Manually operated alarm system
indicator board is to be at a manned control
station.
Page 11 of 22
___________________________________________________________________________________
Sufficient manual fire alarm stations are to be location and concentration of the gas hazard.
installed throughout the accommodation spaces, The combustible gas detectors are to alarm at
service spaces and control stations. One not more than 25% and at 60% of the lower
manually operated call point is to be located at explosive limit (LEL).
each exit. Manually operated call points are to
be readily accessible in the corridors of each 5.2.3 Portable combustible gas detectors
deck such that no part of the corridor is more
than 20 m from a manually operated call point. In addition to the fixed automatic gas detection
Measures are to be taken to prevent inadvertent system, two portable combustible gas detectors
operation of the manual call alarm system. are to be provided on the unit.
a) Cellar deck 5.3 Hydrogen sulphide detection and alarms

b) Drill floor system
c) Mud pit area
d) Shale shaker area 5.3.1 Areas for protection
e) Enclosed spaces containing the open
components of mud circulation system from A fixed automatic hydrogen sulphide gas
the bell nipple to the mud pits. detection and alarm system are to be provided
f) Ventilation intakes of enclosed machinery for the following areas:
spaces contiguous to hazardous areas and
containing internal combustion engines and (a) Drill area;
boilers; and (b) Mud processing area; and
g) Ventilation intakes and near other openings (c) Well test area.
of accommodation spaces.
5.3.2 Alarms
5.2 Combustible gas detection and alarm
systems The detectors are to be connected to an audible
and visual alarm system with indicators in main
5.2.1 Areas for protection control room. The system is to clearly indicate
where gas has been detected.
Fixed automatic combustible gas detection and
alarm systems are to be provided to the Low level alarm set at 10 ppm and high level
satisfaction of IRS so arranged as to monitor alarm set not higher than 300 ppm are to be
continuously all enclosed areas of the unit in designed. The high level alarm is to activate an
which an accumulation of flammable gas may evacuation alarm.
be expected to occur and capable of indicating
at the main control point by aural and visual If the alarm at the main control point is not
means the presence and location of an answered within 2 min, the toxic gas (hydrogen
accumulation. Atleast the following areas are to sulphide) alarm and the helideck status light are
be monitored : to be automatically activated.
5.2.2 Alarms 5.3.3 Portable hydrogen sulphide gas detectors
The gas detectors are to be connected to an At least two portable hydrogen sulphide gas
audible and visual alarm system with indicators monitoring devices are be provided on the unit.
on the drill floor and in the main control station.
The alarm system is to clearly indicate the

Page 12 of 22
Section 6
Fire Fighting Water Supply

6.1 Fire pumps
6.2.6 Relief valves are to be provided in
6.1.1 There are to be at least two independently conjunction with all pumps connected to the fire
driven fire pumps each arranged to draw directly main if the pumps are capable of developing a
from the sea and discharge into a fixed fire pressure exceeding the design pressure of the
main. fire main, hydrants and hoses. Such valves are
to be so placed and adjusted as to prevent
6.1.2 At least one of the required pumps is to be excessive pressure in the fire main system.
dedicated for fire-fighting duties and be available
for such duties at all times. 6.2.7 A fixed fire main is to be provided and be
so equipped and arranged as to meet the
6.1.3 The pumps, their source of power and provisions of 6.2.8 to 6.2.17.
piping and valves are to be so arranged that a
fire in any one compartment will not put all fire 6.2.8 The diameter of the fire main and water
pumps out of action. service pipes is to be sufficient for the effective
distribution of the maximum required discharge
6.2 Pressure from the required fire pumps operating
simultaneously.
6.2.1 The capacity of the required pumps is to
be appropriate to the fire-fighting services 6.2.9 With the required fire pumps operating
supplied from the fire main. Where more pumps simultaneously, the pressure maintained in the
than required are installed, their capacity is to be fire mains is to be to the satisfaction of IRS and
to the satisfaction of IRS. be adequate for the safe and efficient operation
of all equipment supplied there from.
6.2.2 Each fire pump is to be able to maintain a
pressure of at least 3.5 bar at any hydrants with 6.2.10 The fire main is to, where practicable, be
two 19 [mm] nozzles in action. In addition where routed clear of hazardous areas and be
a foam system is provided for protection of the arranged in such a manner as to make
helicopter deck, the pump is to be capable of maximum use of any thermal shielding or
maintaining a pressure of 7.0 bar at the foam physical protection afforded by the structure of
installation and the water consumption used for the unit.
foam system is to be added to the pump
capacity. If the water consumption for any other 6.2.11 The fire main is to be provided with
fire protection or fire-fighting purpose could isolating valves located so as to permit optimum
exceed the rate of the helicopter deck foam utilization in the event of physical damage to any
installation, this consumption is to be the part of the main.
determining factor in calculating the required
capacity of the fire pumps. 6.2.12 The fire main is not to have connections
other than those necessary for fire-fighting
6.2.3 Where either of the required pumps is purposes.
located in a space not normally manned and, in
the opinion of IRS, is relatively far removed from 6.2.13 All practical precautions consistent with
working areas, suitable provision is to be made having water readily available are to be taken to
for remote start-up of that pump and remote protect the fire main against freezing.
operation of associated suction and discharge
valves. 6.2.14 Materials readily rendered ineffective by
heat are not to be used for fire mains and
6.2.4 Except as provided in 6.1.2, sanitary, hydrants unless adequately protected. The
ballast, bilge or general service pumps may be pipes and hydrants are to be so placed that the
accepted as fire pumps, provided that they are fire hoses may be easily coupled to them.
not normally used for pumping oil.
6.2.15 A cock or valve is to be fitted to serve
6.2.5 Every centrifugal pump which is connected each fire hose so that any fire hose may be
to the fire main is to be fitted with a non-return removed while the fire pumps are operating.
valve.
Page 13 of 22
___________________________________________________________________________________
6.2.16 The number and position of the hydrants provided and so arranged that one supply
are to be such that at least two jets of water, not source failure will not put all supply sources out
emanating from the same hydrant, one of which of action.
is to be from a single length of fire hose, may
reach any part of the unit normally accessible to (2) For the self-elevating units, the following
those on board while the unit is being navigated additional fire water supply measures are to be
or is engaged in drilling operations. A hose is to provided:
be provided for every hydrant.
(a) Water is to be supplied from sea water main
6.2.17 Fire hoses are to be of material approved filled by at least two submersible pumping
by IRS and be sufficient in length to project a jet systems. Failure of any one system is not to put
of water to any of the spaces in which they may the other system(s) out of function, and
be required to be used. Their maximum length is
to be to the satisfaction of IRS. Every fire hose (b) Water is to be supplied from drill water
is to be provided with a dual-purpose nozzle and system while unit is lifting or lowering. Water
the necessary couplings. Fire hoses, together stored in the drill water tank(s) is not to be less
3
with any necessary fittings and tools, are to be than 40 m plus engine cooling water
ready for use at any time and are to be kept in consumptions before the unit starts lifting or
conspicuous positions near the water service lowering. Alternatively, water may be supplied
hydrants or connections. from buffer tank(s) in which sea water stored is
not less than the quantity mentioned above.
6.2.18 Fire hoses are to have a length of at least
10 [m], but not more than: 6.5 Additional requirements for periodically
.1 15 [m] in machinery spaces;
6.5.1 Provision is to be made for immediate
.2 20 [m] in other spaces and open decks; and water delivery from the fire main system at a
suitable pressure, due regard being paid to the
.3 25 [m] for open decks with a maximum possibility of freezing, either:
breadth in excess of 30 [m].
.1 by remote starting arrangements for one of
6.3 Nozzles the main fire pumps. The starting positions are
to be provided at strategic locations including
6.3.1 Dual purpose jet spray nozzles are to be the navigating bridge, if any, and a normally
fitted throughout the drilling unit. Nozzles are to manned control station; or
comply with the following
.2 by permanent pressurization of the fire main
.1 Standard nozzle sizes are to be 12 [mm], 16 system, either
[mm] and 19 [mm] or as near thereto as
possible. Larger diameter nozzles may be .2.1 by one of the main fire pumps; or
permitted at the discretion of IRS.
.2.2 by a dedicated pump for the purpose with
.2 For accommodation and service spaces, a automatic starting of one of the main fire pumps
nozzle size greater than 12 [mm] need not be on reduction of the pressure.
used.
6.6 International shore connection
.3 For machinery spaces and exterior locations,
the nozzle size is to be such as to obtain the 6.6.1 The surface unit is to be provided with at
maximum discharge possible from two jets at least one international shore connection
the pressure specified in 6.2.2 from the smallest complying with Rules & Regulations For The
pump, provided that a nozzle size greater than Construction & Classification of Steel Ships Pt.
19 [mm] need not be used. 6, Ch. 3, Sec 4.2.1.7 and the FSS Code.
Facilities are to be available enabling such a
6.4 Supply connection to be used on any side of the unit.
(1) At least two water supply sources (sea

chests, valves, strainers and pipes) are to be

Page 14 of 22
Section 7
Other Fire Fighting Arrangements

7.1 General total power output of not less than 750 kW, are
to be provided with the following arrangements:
7.1.1 This section gives the requirements for
fixed fire extinguishing systems (other than fire .1 one of the fixed arrangements required by
fighting water supply specified in section 6) and paragraph 7.2.1.1; and
for portable fire extinguishers.
.2 one approved foam-type extinguisher of not
7.2 Fire-extinguishing arrangement in less than 45 litres capacity or equivalent in every
machinery spaces and in spaces containing engine space and one approved portable foam
fired processes extinguisher for each 750 kW of engine power
output or part thereof. The total number of
7.2.1 In spaces where main or auxiliary oil-fired portable extinguishers so supplied are to be not
boilers and other fired processes of equivalent less than two and need not exceed six.
thermal rating are situated, or in spaces
containing oil fuel units or settling tanks, the unit 7.2.3 IRS may give special consideration to the
is to be provided with the following: fire-extinguishing arrangements to be provided
in spaces not fitted with fixed fire-extinguishing
.1 One of the following fixed fire-extinguishing installations containing steam turbines which are
systems complying with Rules & Regulations separated from boiler rooms by watertight
For The Construction & Classification of Steel bulkheads.
Ships Pt. 6, Ch.3, Sec. 4.4:
7.2.4 Where, in the opinion of IRS, a fire hazard
.1.1 a fixed pressure water-spraying system; exists in any machinery space for which no
specific provisions for fire-extinguishing
.1.2 a fixed gas fire-extinguishing system; appliances are prescribed in 7.2.1 to 7.2.3, there
is to be provided in, or adjacent to, that space a
.1.3 a fixed high-expansion foam installation. number of approved portable fire extinguishers
or other means of fire extinction to the
Where the machinery space and spaces satisfaction of IRS.
containing fired processes are not entirely
separate, or if fuel oil can drain from the latter 7.3 Fixed fire extinguishing systems on
spaces into the machinery space, the combined drilling areas
machinery space and fired process space is to
be considered as one compartment. (a) A fixed water spray system is to be
provided to protect drilling area. The
.2 At least two approved portable foam minimum water application rate is not to
2
extinguishers or equivalent in each space be less than 20.4 l/min·m , or
containing a fired process and each space in
which a part of the oil fuel installation is situated. (b) At least two dual-purpose (jet/spray) fire
In addition, at least one extinguisher of the same monitors are to be installed to cover
description with a capacity of 9 litres for each drilling and well test areas. The minimum
burner, whereby the total capacity of the capacity of each monitor is not to be less
additional extinguisher or extinguishers need not than 100 m3/h. The monitors may be
exceed 45 litres for any one space. operated either remotely or locally.
Monitor arranged for local operation is to
.3 A receptacle containing sand, sawdust be sited in an accessible protected
impregnated with soda, or other approved dry position.
material in such quantity as may be required by
IRS. An approved portable extinguisher may be 7.4 Fixed fire extinguishing systems on mud
provided as an alternative. processing area
7.2.2 Spaces containing internal combustion A suitable fixed foam system is to be provided.
machinery used either for main propulsion or for The system is to be capable of delivering foam
other purposes, when such machinery has a solution at a rate of not less than 6.5 l/min·m2
(4.1 l/min·m2 for Aqueous Film Forming Foam or
Page 15 of 22
___________________________________________________________________________________
Film-Forming Fluoroprotein Foam) for 15 that is permanently and clearly marked. They
minutes. Alternatively, a gas fixed fire are to be stored in two or more widely separated
extinguishing system may be used for enclosed locations.
mud processing spaces.
7.7 Recharging of air cylinders
7.5 Portable fire extinguishers in
accommodation, service and working spaces 7.7.1 The apparatus for recharging air cylinders,
if provided, is to have its power supplied from
7.5.1 Except for the supplemental arrangements the emergency supply or be independently
provided in 7.5.2, portable fire extinguishers in diesel-powered, and be so constructed or
accommodation spaces, service spaces, control equipped that the air cylinders may be used
stations, machinery spaces of category A, other immediately after recharging.
machinery spaces, cargo spaces, weather deck
and other spaces are to be provided in number 7.7.2 The apparatus is to be suitably located in a
and arrangement in accordance with sheltered space above main deck level on the
“MSC.1/Circ.1275 “ Number and Arrangement of unit.
Portable Fire Extinguishers on Board Ships.”
7.7.3 Intakes for air compressors are to draw
7.5.2 Table 7.1 contains supplemental from a source of clean air.
recommendations for number and distribution of
additional portable fire extinguishers on mobile 7.7.4 The air is to be filtered after compression
offshore drilling units. Where the to eliminate compressor oil contamination.
recommendations in table 7.1 differ from the
MSC.1/Circ.1275, the provisions of table 7.1 are 7.7.5 The recharging capacity is to meet the
to be followed. In all cases, the selection of the requirements of Rules & Regulations For The
fire extinguishing medium is to be based on the Construction & Classification of Steel Ships Pt.
fire hazard for the space protected. The classes 6, Ch. 3, Cl. 4.10.2.6.
of portable fire extinguishers in the table are
only for reference. 7.7.6 The equipment and its installation are to
be to the satisfaction of IRS.
7.6 Fire-fighters’ outfits
7.8 Additional requirements for periodically
7.6.1 At least two fire-fighters’ outfits complying unattended machinery spaces
with the relevant requirements of Rules &
Regulations For The Construction & 7.8.1 An approved fixed fire-extinguishing
Classification of Steel Ships, Pt. 6, Ch. 8 are to system is to be provided in units that are not
be provided, each with portable instruments for required to have this provision by 7.2.
measuring oxygen and flammable vapour
concentrations acceptable to IRS. 7.8.2 IRS may give special consideration to
maintaining the fire integrity of the machinery
7.6.2 Two spare charges are to be provided for spaces, to the location and centralization of the
each required breathing apparatus. Units that fire-extinguishing system controls and to the
are equipped with suitably located means for required shutdown arrangements (e.g.,
fully recharging the air cylinders free from ventilation, fuel pumps, etc.); it may require
contamination need carry only one spare charge additional fire-extinguishing appliances and
for each required apparatus. other fire-fighting equipment and breathing
apparatus.
7.6.3 The fire-fighters’ outfits are to be kept
ready for use in an easily accessible location

Page 16 of 22
Table 7.1 : Recommended number and distribution of additional portable extinguishers

(refer Cl. 7.5.2)
1 Class(es) of
Type of Space Minimum number of extinguishers extinguisher(s)
1; and 1 additional extinguisher
Space containing the controls for the suitable for electrical fires when main
main source of electrical power A and/or C
switchboards are arranged in the
space
Cranes:
With electric motors/hydraulics 0
2
Cranes: (1 in cab and 1 at exterior of
With internal combustion engine B
engine compartment)
2
Drill floor (1 at each exit) C
Helidecks In accordance with section 3 B

Machinery spaces of category A In accordance with section 7.2 B
Machinery spaces of category A At each entrance in accordance
which are periodically unattended B
with section 7.2 2
Main switchboards 2 in the vicinity C
1 for each enclosed space
Mud pits, Mud processing areas (Travel distance to an extinguisher B
not to exceed 10 [m] for open space)
1 Minimum size is to be in accordance with paragraph 4.2.1.1 of chapter 8 of the Rules & Regulations
for The Construction & Classification of Steel Ships.
2
A portable extinguisher provided for that space may be located outside near the entrance to that
space. A portable fire extinguisher placed outside near the entrance to that space may also
be considered as satisfying the provisions for the space in which it is located.

Page 17 of 22
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 8
Escape
8.1 Means of escape 8.1.2 Two means of escape are to be provided
from each machinery space of category A.
8.1.1 Within the accommodation spaces, service Ladders are to be of steel or other equivalent
spaces and control stations the following material. In particular, one of the following
provisions are to be applied: provisions is to be complied with:
.1 In every general area which is likely to be .1 two sets of ladders, as widely separated as
regularly manned or in which personnel are possible, leading to doors in the upper part of
accommodated at least two separate escape the space, similarly separated and from which
routes are to be provided, situated as far apart access is provided to the open deck. One of
as practicable, to allow ready means of escape these ladders is to be located within a protected
to the open decks and embarkation stations. enclosure that satisfies tables 2.1 and 2.2,
Exceptionally, IRS may permit only one means category (4), from the lower part of the space it
of escape, due regard being paid to the nature serves to a safe position outside the space. Self-
and location of spaces and to the number of closing fire doors of the same fire integrity
persons who might normally be accommodated standards are to be fitted in the enclosure. The
or employed there. ladder is to be fixed in such a way that heat is
not transferred into the enclosure through non-
.2 Stairways are normally to be used for means insulated fixing points. The enclosure is to have
of vertical escape; however, a vertical ladder minimum internal dimensions of at least 800
may be used for one of the means of escape [mm] by 800 [mm], and is to have emergency
when the installation of a stairway is shown to lighting provisions; or
be impracticable.
.2 one ladder leading to a door in the upper part
.3 Every escape route is to be readily accessible of the space from which access is provided to
and unobstructed and all exit doors along the the open deck. Additionally, in the lower part of
route are to be readily operable. Dead-end the space, in a position well separated from the
corridors exceeding 7 [m] in length are not to be ladder referred to, a steel door capable of being
provided. operated from each side is to be provided with
access to a safe escape route from the lower
.4 In addition to the emergency lighting, the part of the space to the open deck.
means of escape in accommodation areas,
including stairways and exits, is to be marked by 8.1.3 From machinery spaces other than those
lighting or photoluminescent strip indicators of category A, escape routes are to be provided
placed not more than 300 [mm] above the deck to the satisfaction of IRS having regard to the
at all points of the escape route, including nature and location of the space and whether
angles and intersections. The marking is to persons are normally employed there.
enable personnel to identify the routes of
escape and readily identify the escape exits. If 8.1.4 Lifts are not to be considered as forming
electric illumination is used, it is to be supplied one of the required means of escape.
by the emergency source of power and it is to
be so arranged that the failure of any single light 8.1.5 Consideration may be given by IRS to the
or cut in a lighting strip will not result in the siting of superstructures and deckhouses such
marking being ineffective. Additionally, escape that in the event of fire at the drill floor at least
route signs and fire equipment location markings one escape route to the embarkation position
are to be of photoluminescent material or and survival craft is protected against radiation
marked by lighting. IRS will verify that such effects of that fire as far as practicable.
lighting or photoluminescent equipment has
been evaluated, tested and applied in 8.1.6 Stairways and corridors used as a means
accordance with Rules & Regulations For The of escape are to meet the provisions of Rules &
Construction & Classification of Steel Ships Pt. Regulations For The Construction &
6, Ch. 8. Classification of Steel Ships, Pt. 6, Ch. 8, Sec.
13.3.

Page 18 of 22
8.2 Emergency escape breathing devices EEBD is to, as a minimum, be provided on each
deck or platform level near the escape ladder
8.2.1 Emergency escape breathing devices constituting the second means of escape from
(EEBDs) are to comply with the Rules & the space (the other means being an enclosed
Regulations For The Construction & escape trunk or watertight door at the lower
Classification of Steel Ships, Pt. 6, Ch. 8. Spare level of the space).
emergency escape breathing devices are to be
kept on board to the satisfaction of IRS. .3 For other machinery spaces, the number and
location of EEBDs will be specially considered.
8.2.2 Emergency escape breathing devices are
to be provided as follows: 8.3 Respiratory protection equipment for
hydrogen sulphide
.1 In machinery spaces of category A containing
internal combustion machinery used for main 8.3.1 A self-contained breathing apparatus
propulsion, EEBDs are to be positioned as (SCBA) positive-pressure/pressure-demand
follows: breathing equipment with full-face piece and
rated for a minimum of 30 minutes is to be
.1.1 one (1) EEBD in the engine control room, if provided for each person in working areas
located within the machinery space; where hydrogen sulphide may be encountered,
and a SCBA rated for a minimum of 15 minutes
.1.2 one (1) EEBD in workshop areas. If there is, is to be provided for each person in other areas,
however, a direct access to an escape way from or,
the workshop, an EEBD is not required; and
8.3.2 A positive-pressure/pressure-demand air
.1.3 one (1) EEBD on each deck or platform line breathing equipment with a low pressure
level near the escape ladder constituting the warning alarm coupled with a SCBA rated for a
second means of escape from the machinery minimum of 15 minutes is to be provided for
space (the other means being an enclosed each person on board the unit.
escape trunk or watertight door at the lower
level of the space). Breathing air supply line stations are to be
provided at least in the following areas:
.1.4 Alternatively, a different number or location
may be determined by IRS taking into (a) Living quarter;
consideration the layout and dimensions or the (b) Muster/evacuation area;
normal manning of the space. (c) Drilling areas;
(d) Mud processing areas; and
.2 For machinery spaces of category A other (e) Other working areas.
than those containing internal combustion
machinery used for main propulsion, one (1)
Section 9
Fire Fighting Equipment for Helicopter Facilities

9.1 General .1 helideck structure is to be adequate to protect
the unit from the fire hazards associated with
9.1.1 Where areas of a drilling unit are helicopter operations;
designated for helicopter facilities, the fire
fighting systems as given in 9.2 and 9.3 are to .2 fire-fighting appliances are to be provided to
be provided are to be provided and so arranged adequately protect the unit from the fire hazards
as to adequately protect both the helicopter associated with helicopter operations;
deck and fuel storage areas.
.3 refuelling facilities and operations are to
This section provides additional measures in provide the necessary measures to
order to address the fire safety objectives for protect the unit from the fire hazards associated
units fitted with facilities for helicopters and with helicopter operations; and
meets the following functional provisions:

Page 19 of 22
___________________________________________________________________________________
.4 helicopter facility operation manuals, which 9.2.2 Fixed fire fighting systems
may be included in the operation
manual(Chapter 1 of the Rules) and training are (a) Fire water system: at least two
to be provided. approved nozzles of jet/spray type and hoses
sufficient in length to reach any part of the
9.1.2 The construction of the helidecks is to be helicopter deck.
of steel or other equivalent materials. If the
helideck forms the deckhead of a deckhouse or (b) Fixed foam system: A suitable foam
superstructure, it is to be insulated to “A-60” application system consisting of monitors or
class standard. If IRS permits aluminium or hose streams or both is to be installed. The
other low melting point metal construction that is system is to be capable of delivering foam
not made equivalent to steel, the following solution at a rate of not less than 6 l/min·m2 (4.1
provisions are to be satisfied: l/min·m2 for Aqueous Film Forming Foam or
Film-Forming Fluoroprotein Foam) for at least 5
.1 if the helideck is cantilevered over the side of minutes
the unit, after each fire that may have an effect
on the structural integrity of the helideck or its i) foam delivery at the minimum application rate
supporting structures, the helideck is to undergo is to start within 30 [s] of system activation;
a structural analysis to determine its suitability
for further use; and a) the principal agent should be suitable for use
with salt water and conform to performance
.2 if the helideck is located above the unit’s standards not inferior to those acceptable to
deckhouse or similar structure, the following IRS;
conditions are to be satisfied:
b) in addition to the provisions of 7.4, two fire-
.2.1 the deckhouse top and bulkheads under the fighter’s outfits; and
helideck are to have no openings;
c) at least the following equipment are to be
.2.2 windows under the helideck are to be stored in a manner that provides for immediate
provided with steel shutters; and use and protection from the elements:
.2.3 after each fire on the helideck or supporting i) adjustable wrench;

structure the helideck is to undergo a structural
analysis to determine its suitability for further ii) blanket, fire-resistant;
use.
iii) cutters, bolt, 600 [mm];
9.1.3 A helideck is to be provided with both a
main and an emergency means of escape and iv) hook, grab or salving;
access for fire fighting and rescue personnel.
These are to be located as far apart from each v) hacksaw, heavy duty complete with six
other as is practicable and preferably on spare blades;
opposite sides of the helideck.
vi) ladder;
9.2 Fire fighting arrangements
vii) lift line 5 [mm] diameter and 30 [m] in
9.2.1 Portable fire extinguishers length;
(a) Primary extinguishers: dry powder viii) pliers, side-cutting;

extinguishers of a total capacity of not less than
45 kg. ix) set of assorted screwdrivers;
(b) Back-up extinguishers: CO2 x) harness knife complete with sheath; and
extinguishers of a total capacity of not less than
18 kg or equivalent, one of these extinguishers xi) crowbar.
being so equipped as to enable it to reach the
engine area of any helicopter using the deck. d) Drainage facilities in way of helidecks are to
The back-up extinguishers are to be located so be:
that they would not be vulnerable to the same
damage as the primary extinguishers.

Page 20 of 22
i) constructed of steel or other

arrangements providing equivalent fire .5.1 design of the tank for its intended purpose;
safety;
.5.2 mounting and securing arrangements;
ii) lead directly overboard independent of
any other system; and .5.3 electric bonding; and
iii) designed so that drainage does not fall .5.4 inspection procedures;
onto any part of the unit.
9.3.6 storage tank fuel pumps are to be provided
9.3 Additional requirements for helicopter with means which permit shutdown from a safe
facilities with refueling capabilities remote location in the event of a fire. Where a
gravity-fuelling system is installed, equivalent
9.3.1 Fire fighting systems as in 9.2 and so closing arrangements are to be provided to
arranged as to adequately protect both the isolate the fuel source;
helicopter deck and fuel storage areas.
9.3.7 the fuel pumping unit is to be connected to
9.3.2 a designated area is to be provided for the one tank at a time. The piping between the tank
storage of fuel tanks which is to be: and the pumping unit is to be of steel or
equivalent material, as short as possible, and
.2.1 as remote as is practicable from protected against damage;
accommodation spaces, escape routes and
embarkation stations; and 9.3.8 electrical fuel pumping units and
associated control equipment are to be of a type
.2.2 isolated from areas containing a source of suitable for the location and potential hazards;
vapour ignition;
9.3.9 fuel pumping units are to incorporate a
9.3.3 the fuel storage area is to be provided with device which will prevent over-pressurization of
arrangements whereby fuel spillage may be the delivery or filling hose;
collected and drained to a safe location;
9.3.10 equipment used in refuelling operations is
9.3.4 tanks and associated equipment are to be to be electrically bonded; and
protected against physical damage and from a
fire in an adjacent space or area; 9.3.11 “NO SMOKING” signs are to be
displayed at appropriate locations.
9.3.5 where portable fuel storage tanks are
used, special attention is to be given to:

Page 21 of 22
___________________________________________________________________________________
Section 10
Operational Readiness and Maintenance

10.1 General maintenance and inspection of fire protection
systems and appliances-MSC/Circ.850) and in a
10.1.1 The following functional provisions are to manner having due regard to ensuring the
be met: reliability of fire-fighting systems and appliances.
.1 gas detection systems, fire protection 10.3.2 The maintenance plan is to be kept on
systems and fire-fighting systems and board the unit and be available for inspection
appliances are to be maintained ready for use; whenever required by IRS.
and
10.3.3 The maintenance plan is to include at
.2 gas detection systems, fire protection least the following fire protection systems and
systems and fire-fighting systems and fire-fighting systems and appliances, where
appliances are to be properly tested and installed:
inspected.
.1 fire mains, fire pumps and hydrants including
10.1.2 At all times while the unit is in service, the hoses, nozzles and international shore
provisions of 10.1 are to be complied with. A unit connections;
is not in service when:
.2 fixed fire detection and fire alarm systems;
.1 it is in for repairs or lay up (either at anchor or
in port) or in dry-dock; .3 fixed fire-extinguishing systems and other fire-
extinguishing appliances;
.2 it is declared not in service by the owner or
the owner’s representative. .4 automatic sprinkler, fire detection and fire
alarm systems;
10.2 Operational readiness
.5 ventilation systems including fire and smoke
10.2.1 The following gas detection and fire dampers, fans and their controls;
protection systems are to be kept in good order
so as to ensure their intended performance if a .6 emergency shut down of fuel supply;
fire occurs:
.7 fire doors including their controls;
.1.1 structural fire protection including fire-
resisting divisions and protection of openings .8 general emergency alarm systems;
and penetrations in these divisions;
.9 emergency escape breathing devices;
.1.2 fire detection and fire alarm systems;
.10 portable fire extinguishers including spare
.1.3 gas detection and alarm systems; and charges or spare extinguishers;
.1.4 means of escape systems and appliances. .11 portable hydrogen sulphide gas detection
monitoring devices;
10.2.2 Fire-fighting systems and appliances and
portable gas detection systems are to be kept in .12 portable flammable gas and oxygen
good working order and readily available for monitoring devices;
immediate use. Portable extinguishers which
have been discharged are to be immediately .13 gas detection and alarm systems; and
recharged or replaced with an equivalent unit.
.14 fire-fighter’s outfits.
10.3 Maintenance, testing and inspections
10.3.4 The maintenance program may be
10.3.1 Maintenance, testing and inspections are computer-based.
to be carried out based on the guidelines
developed by IMO (refer to the guidelines on

Page 22 of 22
__________________________________________________________________________________
Section 11
Alarms
11.1 General alarms
11.3 Ventilation system alarm
11.1.1 A general alarm system is to be
provided and so installed as to be clearly See Ch. 11, Sec 2.2
perceptible in all parts of the unit. Alarm signal
devices are to be provided which will produce a 11.4 Public address
distinctive and strong note.
11.4.1 The public address system is to be a
The signals used should be limited to general loudspeaker installation enabling the broadcast
emergency, toxic gas (hydrogen sulphide), of messages into all spaces where personnel
combustible gas, fire alarm and abandon unit are normally present and muster stations. It is to
signals. allow for the broadcast of messages from
navigation bridge, central control room,
The signals given over the general alarm system emergency response centre, engine control
should be supplemented by instructions over the room, ballast control station, jacking control
public address system. station and drilling console. It is to be installed
taking into account any acoustically marginal
11.1.2 General alarm is to be capable of being conditions and not require any action from the
operated at least in the following spaces: addressee. It is to be protected against
unauthorized use.
(a) Main control station;
(b) Drilling console; 11.4.2 The minimum sound pressure levels for
(c) Navigating bridge (if any); and broadcasting emergency announcements are to
(d) Fire control station (if any). be:
11.2 Mud system level alarms (1) In interior spaces 75dB(A) and at least
20dB(A) above the speech interference
11.2.1 A suitable audible and visual alarm to level; and
indicate significant increase or decrease in the
level of the contents of the mud pit is to be (2) In exterior spaces 80dB(A) and at least
provided at the control station for drilling 15dB(A) above the speech interference
operations and at the mud pit. Equivalent means level.
to indicate possible abnormal conditions in the
drilling system may be considered by IRS.
End Of Chapter

himMODU Rules January 2013 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

himMODU Rules January 2013 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

himMODU Rules January 2013 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Indian Register of Shipping

Rules and Regulations for

1. Register Book - 2012 - with Quarterly Supplements (Also available on CD)

Rules Change Notice No.1 – January, 2013

(Consolidated Rules January, 2013 available on CD)

Part 1 : General Regulations

Part 1 : General Regulations

4. Type Approval Certification Schemes

 Type Approval Certification Scheme for Machinery Manufactured by Mass Production

5. Other Information - available on Request

 List of Type Approved Products

A summary of additions and amendments incorporated in this edition are

Indian Register of Shipping

TABLE-1 AMENDMENTS INCORPORATED IN THIS EDITION

Section 2 Definitions added as per MODU Code 2009

Chapter 2 : Periodical Surveys

Chapter 3 : Manufacture, Survey and Certification

1/1.1.4, 1.1.4 Minimization of hazardous materials and prohibition of Asbestos

Chapter 4 : Design Loads

3/3.2.2 Effect of immersion, heeling etc to be considered for wave loads.

Chapter 5 : Stability, Watertight / Weathertight Integrity and Loadline

Section 3 Clarifications added regarding application of Loadline requirements to various types

Indian Register of Shipping

Chapter 8 : Column Stabilized Drilling Units

Chapter 10 : Temporary Mooring Equipment and Position Keeping Systems and

3/3.1.1 Reference to main rules for anchoring and mooring equipment

3/3.2.9 Reference to IMO Circulars on Dynamic Positioning systems

Chapter 11 : Hazardous Areas

Section 1, Amendments to definition of zones and clarification on specific areas.

3/3.2 Clarifications on ventilation requirements in hazardous areas.

Section 4 Special requirements for dangerous goods added.

Chapter 13 : Electrical Installations

Annex 1 List of IEC standards applicable to MODU is added.

Chapter 14 : Safety Features

Indian Register of Shipping

Rules and Regulations for the Construction and Classification of

Chapter 2 Periodical Surveys

Chapter 4 Design Loads

Chapter 5 Stability, Watertight/Weathertight Integrity and

Chapter 7 Self-Elevating Drilling Units

Chapter 8 Column Stabilized Drilling Units

Chapter 9 Surface Type Drilling Units

Chapter 10 Temporary Mooring Equipment and Position

Chapter 11 Hazardous Areas

Chapter 13 Electrical Installations

Chapter 14 Safety Features

Section 1 3.10 Repairs

Definitions 4.3 Plans and design data

Classification Regulations 4.6 Operating manuals

3.1 General 4.7 Construction booklet

3.2 Application of Rules 4.8 Records

3.3 Scope of classification Section 5

3.7 Class notations - Machinery 5.1 General procedure for classification of

Indian Register of Shipping

1.2 Survey pre-planning and record keeping Section 4

1.3 Reactivation surveys Special Surveys - Hull

1.5 Alterations 4.2 Special continuous surveys

1.6 Unscheduled surveys 4.3 Special survey No.1

2.5 Survey requirements - Column-stabilized